]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blob - ld/ld.texi
include: Sync with GCC
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set M68HC11
27 @set M68K
28 @set MIPS
29 @set MMIX
30 @set MSP430
31 @set NDS32
32 @set NIOSII
33 @set POWERPC
34 @set POWERPC64
35 @set Renesas
36 @set S/390
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset ARM
138 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset M68HC11
141 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset HPPA
144 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset M68K
147 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset MIPS
150 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset POWERPC
153 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC64
156 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset S/390
159 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifclear SingleFormat
381 @cindex binary input format
382 @kindex -b @var{format}
383 @kindex --format=@var{format}
384 @cindex input format
385 @cindex input format
386 @item -b @var{input-format}
387 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
388 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
389 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
390 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
391 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
392 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
393 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
394 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
395 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
396 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
397 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
398 @xref{BFD}.
399
400 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
401 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
402 linking object files of different formats), by including
403 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
404 particular format.
405
406 The default format is taken from the environment variable
407 @code{GNUTARGET}.
408 @ifset UsesEnvVars
409 @xref{Environment}.
410 @end ifset
411 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
412 @code{TARGET};
413 @ifclear man
414 see @ref{Format Commands}.
415 @end ifclear
416 @end ifclear
417
418 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
419 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @cindex compatibility, MRI
421 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
422 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
423 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
424 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
425 @ifclear man
426 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
427 @end ifclear
428 @ifset man
429 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
430 @end ifset
431 Introduce MRI script files with
432 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
433 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
434 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
435 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
436
437 @cindex common allocation
438 @kindex -d
439 @kindex -dc
440 @kindex -dp
441 @item -d
442 @itemx -dc
443 @itemx -dp
444 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
445 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
446 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
447 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
448 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
449
450 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
451 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
455 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
456 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
457 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
458 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
459 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
460
461 @cindex entry point, from command line
462 @kindex -e @var{entry}
463 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
464 @item -e @var{entry}
465 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
466 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
467 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
468 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
469 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
470 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
471 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
472 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
473
474 @kindex --exclude-libs
475 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
476 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
477 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
478 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
479 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
480 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
481 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
482 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
483 be treated as hidden.
484
485 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
486 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
487 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
488 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
489 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
490 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
491 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
492 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
493 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
494 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
495 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
496 regardless of this option.
497
498 @cindex dynamic symbol table
499 @kindex -E
500 @kindex --export-dynamic
501 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
502 @item -E
503 @itemx --export-dynamic
504 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
505 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
506 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
507 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
508 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
509
510 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
511 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
512 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
513 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
514
515 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
516 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
517 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
518 linking the program itself.
519
520 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
521 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
522 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
523
524 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
525 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
526 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
527
528 @ifclear SingleFormat
529 @cindex big-endian objects
530 @cindex endianness
531 @kindex -EB
532 @item -EB
533 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
534
535 @cindex little-endian objects
536 @kindex -EL
537 @item -EL
538 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
539 @end ifclear
540
541 @kindex -f @var{name}
542 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
543 @item -f @var{name}
544 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
545 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
546 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
547 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
548 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
549
550 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
551 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
552 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
553 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
554 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
555 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
556 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
557 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
558 machine specific performance.
559
560 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
561 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
562
563 @kindex -F @var{name}
564 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
565 @item -F @var{name}
566 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
567 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
568 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
569 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
570 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
571
572 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
573 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
574 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
575 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
576 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
577 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
578 @var{name}.
579
580 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
581 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
582 object files.
583 @ifclear SingleFormat
584 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
585 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
586 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
587 environment variable.
588 @end ifclear
589 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
590 creating an ELF shared object.
591
592 @cindex finalization function
593 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
594 @item -fini=@var{name}
595 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
596 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
597 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
598 the function to call.
599
600 @kindex -g
601 @item -g
602 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
603
604 @kindex -G @var{value}
605 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
606 @cindex object size
607 @item -G @var{value}
608 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
609 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
610 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
611 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
612 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
613
614 @cindex runtime library name
615 @kindex -h @var{name}
616 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
617 @item -h @var{name}
618 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
619 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
620 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
621 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
622 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
623 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
624
625 @kindex -i
626 @cindex incremental link
627 @item -i
628 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
629
630 @cindex initialization function
631 @kindex -init=@var{name}
632 @item -init=@var{name}
633 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
634 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
635 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
636 function to call.
637
638 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
639 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
640 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
641 @item -l @var{namespec}
642 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
643 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
644 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
645 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
646 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
647 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
648
649 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
650 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
651 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
652 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
653 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
654 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
655 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
656 @var{filename}.
657
658 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
659 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
660 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
661 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
662 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
663 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
664
665 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
666 archives multiple times.
667
668 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
669
670 @ifset GENERIC
671 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
672 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
673 behaviour of the AIX linker.
674 @end ifset
675
676 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
677 @kindex -L @var{dir}
678 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
679 @item -L @var{searchdir}
680 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
681 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
682 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
683 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
684 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
685 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
686 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
687 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
688 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
689 option is specified.
690
691 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
692 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
693 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
694
695 @ifset UsesEnvVars
696 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
697 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
698 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
699 @end ifset
700
701 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
702 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
703 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
704
705 @cindex emulation
706 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
707 @item -m @var{emulation}
708 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
709 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
710
711 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
712 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
713
714 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
715 configured.
716
717 @cindex link map
718 @kindex -M
719 @kindex --print-map
720 @item -M
721 @itemx --print-map
722 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
723 information about the link, including the following:
724
725 @itemize @bullet
726 @item
727 Where object files are mapped into memory.
728 @item
729 How common symbols are allocated.
730 @item
731 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
732 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
733 @item
734 The values assigned to symbols.
735
736 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
737 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
738 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
739 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
740 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
741 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
742 linker script containing:
743
744 @smallexample
745 foo = 1
746 foo = foo * 4
747 foo = foo + 8
748 @end smallexample
749
750 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
751 option is used:
752
753 @smallexample
754 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
755 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
757 @end smallexample
758
759 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
760 scripts.
761 @end itemize
762
763 @kindex -n
764 @cindex read-only text
765 @cindex NMAGIC
766 @kindex --nmagic
767 @item -n
768 @itemx --nmagic
769 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
770 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
771 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
772
773 @kindex -N
774 @kindex --omagic
775 @cindex read/write from cmd line
776 @cindex OMAGIC
777 @item -N
778 @itemx --omagic
779 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
780 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
781 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
782 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
783 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
784 specification published by Microsoft.
785
786 @kindex --no-omagic
787 @cindex OMAGIC
788 @item --no-omagic
789 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
790 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
791 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
792 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
793
794 @kindex -o @var{output}
795 @kindex --output=@var{output}
796 @cindex naming the output file
797 @item -o @var{output}
798 @itemx --output=@var{output}
799 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
800 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
801 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
802
803 @kindex -O @var{level}
804 @cindex generating optimized output
805 @item -O @var{level}
806 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
807 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
808 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
809 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
810 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
811 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
812 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
813
814 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
815 @item -plugin @var{name}
816 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
817 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
818 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
819 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
820 wish.
821
822 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
823 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
824 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
825 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
826 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
827 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
828 just copy in the newest one.
829
830 @kindex --push-state
831 @cindex push state governing input file handling
832 @item --push-state
833 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
834 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
835 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
836
837 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
838 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
839 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
840 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
841 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
842 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
843
844 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
845 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
846 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
847 something as follows:
848
849 @smallexample
850 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
851 @end smallexample
852
853 @kindex --pop-state
854 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
855 @item --pop-state
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex --strip-discarded
930 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
931 @item --strip-discarded
932 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
933 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
934 Enabled by default.
935
936 @kindex -t
937 @kindex --trace
938 @cindex input files, displaying
939 @item -t
940 @itemx --trace
941 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
942
943 @kindex -T @var{script}
944 @kindex --script=@var{script}
945 @cindex script files
946 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
947 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
948 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
949 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
950 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
951 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
952 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
953 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
954 options accumulate.
955
956 @kindex -dT @var{script}
957 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
958 @cindex script files
959 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
960 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
961 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
962
963 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
964 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
965 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
966 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
967 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
968 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
969 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
970 @samp{gcc}).
971
972 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
973 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
974 @cindex undefined symbol
975 @item -u @var{symbol}
976 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
977 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
978 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
979 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
980 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
981 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
982
983 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
984 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
985 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
986 instead.
987
988 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
989 @cindex symbols, require defined
990 @cindex defined symbol
991 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
992 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
993 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
994 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
995 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
996 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
997 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
998
999 @kindex -Ur
1000 @cindex constructors
1001 @item -Ur
1002 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1003 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1004 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1005 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1006 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1007 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1008 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1009 @samp{-r} for the others.
1010
1011 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1012 @cindex orphan sections
1013 @cindex sections, orphan
1014 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1015 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1016 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1017
1018 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1019
1020 @table @code
1021 @item place
1022 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1023 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1024 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1025
1026 @item discard
1027 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1028 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1029
1030 @item warn
1031 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1032 issue a warning.
1033
1034 @item error
1035 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1036 @end table
1037
1038 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1039
1040 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1041 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1042 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1043 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1044 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1045 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1046 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1047 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1048 in a linker script.
1049
1050 @kindex -v
1051 @kindex -V
1052 @kindex --version
1053 @cindex version
1054 @item -v
1055 @itemx --version
1056 @itemx -V
1057 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1058 lists the supported emulations.
1059
1060 @kindex -x
1061 @kindex --discard-all
1062 @cindex deleting local symbols
1063 @item -x
1064 @itemx --discard-all
1065 Delete all local symbols.
1066
1067 @kindex -X
1068 @kindex --discard-locals
1069 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1070 @item -X
1071 @itemx --discard-locals
1072 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1073 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1074 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1075
1076 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1077 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1078 @cindex symbol tracing
1079 @item -y @var{symbol}
1080 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1081 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1082 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1083 to prepend an underscore.
1084
1085 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1086 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1087
1088 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1089 @item -Y @var{path}
1090 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1091 for Solaris compatibility.
1092
1093 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1094 @item -z @var{keyword}
1095 The recognized keywords are:
1096 @table @samp
1097
1098 @item bndplt
1099 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1100
1101 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1102 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1103 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1104 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1105 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1106 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1107 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1108 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1109 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1110 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1111 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1112
1113 @item combreloc
1114 @itemx nocombreloc
1115 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1116 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1117
1118 @item common
1119 @itemx nocommon
1120 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1121 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1122
1123 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1124 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1125 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1126 using pages of this size.
1127
1128 @item defs
1129 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1130 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1131 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1132
1133 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1134 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1135 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1136 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1137 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1138 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1139 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1140 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1141 these options.
1142
1143 @item execstack
1144 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1145
1146 @item global
1147 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1148 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1149 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1150
1151 @item globalaudit
1152 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1153 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1154 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1155 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1156 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command line options be run for
1157 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1158
1159 @item ibtplt
1160 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1161 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1162
1163 @item ibt
1164 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1165 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1166 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1167
1168 @item initfirst
1169 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1170 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1171 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1172 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1173 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1174 objects.
1175
1176 @item interpose
1177 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1178 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1179 libraries not so marked.
1180
1181 @item lazy
1182 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1183 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1184 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1185 Lazy binding is the default.
1186
1187 @item loadfltr
1188 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1189
1190 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1191 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1192
1193 @item muldefs
1194 Allow multiple definitions.
1195
1196 @item nocopyreloc
1197 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1198 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1199
1200 @item nodefaultlib
1201 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1202 should ignore any default library search paths.
1203
1204 @item nodelete
1205 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1206
1207 @item nodlopen
1208 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1209
1210 @item nodump
1211 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1212
1213 @item noexecstack
1214 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1215
1216 @item noextern-protected-data
1217 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1218 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1219 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1220 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1221 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1222 i386 and x86-64.
1223
1224 @item noreloc-overflow
1225 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1226 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1227 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1228
1229 @item now
1230 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1231 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1232 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1233 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1234 called.
1235
1236 @item origin
1237 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1238
1239 @item relro
1240 @itemx norelro
1241 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1242 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1243 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1244 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1245 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1246
1247 @item separate-code
1248 @itemx noseparate-code
1249 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1250 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1251 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1252 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1253
1254 @item shstk
1255 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1256 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1257 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1258
1259 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1260 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1261 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1262 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1263
1264 @item text
1265 @itemx notext
1266 @itemx textoff
1267 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1268 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1269 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1270
1271 @item undefs
1272 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1273 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1274 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1275
1276 @end table
1277
1278 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1279
1280 @kindex -(
1281 @cindex groups of archives
1282 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1283 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1284 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1285 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1286
1287 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1288 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1289 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1290 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1291 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1292 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1293 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1294 resolved.
1295
1296 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1297 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1298 more archives.
1299
1300 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1301 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1302 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1303 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1304 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1305 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1306 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1307 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1308 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1309 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1310 restore the old behaviour.
1311
1312 @kindex --as-needed
1313 @kindex --no-as-needed
1314 @item --as-needed
1315 @itemx --no-as-needed
1316 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1317 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1318 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1319 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1320 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1321 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1322 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1323 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1324 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1325 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1326 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1327 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1328 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1329
1330 @kindex --add-needed
1331 @kindex --no-add-needed
1332 @item --add-needed
1333 @itemx --no-add-needed
1334 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1335 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1336 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1337 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1338
1339 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1340 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1341 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1342
1343 @kindex -Bdynamic
1344 @kindex -dy
1345 @kindex -call_shared
1346 @item -Bdynamic
1347 @itemx -dy
1348 @itemx -call_shared
1349 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1350 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1351 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1352 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1353 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1354 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1355
1356 @kindex -Bgroup
1357 @item -Bgroup
1358 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1359 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1360 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1361 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1362 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1363
1364 @kindex -Bstatic
1365 @kindex -dn
1366 @kindex -non_shared
1367 @kindex -static
1368 @item -Bstatic
1369 @itemx -dn
1370 @itemx -non_shared
1371 @itemx -static
1372 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1373 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1374 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1375 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1376 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1377 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1378 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1379 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1380 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1381 libraries.
1382
1383 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1384 @item -Bsymbolic
1385 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1386 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1387 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1388 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1389 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1390 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1391 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1392 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1393
1394 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1395 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1396 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1397 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1398 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1399 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1400 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1401 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1402 libraries and position independent executables.
1403
1404 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1405 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1406 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1407 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1408 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1409 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1410 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1411 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1412 which support shared libraries.
1413
1414 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1415 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1416
1417 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1418 @item --dynamic-list-data
1419 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1420
1421 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1422 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1423 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1424 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1425
1426 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1427 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1428 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1429
1430 @kindex --check-sections
1431 @kindex --no-check-sections
1432 @item --check-sections
1433 @itemx --no-check-sections
1434 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1435 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1436 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1437 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1438 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1439 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1440 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1441 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1442 option.
1443
1444 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1445 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1446 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1447 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1448 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1449 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1450 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1451 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1452 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1453 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1454 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1455 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1456
1457 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1458 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1459 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1460 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1461 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1462 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1463 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1464 symbols.
1465
1466 @cindex cross reference table
1467 @kindex --cref
1468 @item --cref
1469 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1470 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1471 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1472
1473 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1474 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1475 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1476 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1477 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1478 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1479 symbol are listed.
1480
1481 @cindex common allocation
1482 @kindex --no-define-common
1483 @item --no-define-common
1484 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1485 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1486 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1487
1488 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1489 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1490 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1491 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1492 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1493 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1494 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1495 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1496 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1497 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1498
1499 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1500 @cindex section groups
1501 @cindex COMDAT
1502 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1503 @item --force-group-allocation
1504 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1505 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1506 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1507 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1508 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1509 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1510
1511 @cindex symbols, from command line
1512 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1513 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1514 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1515 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1516 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1517 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1518 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1519 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1520 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1521 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1522 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1523 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1524
1525 @cindex demangling, from command line
1526 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1527 @kindex --no-demangle
1528 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1529 @itemx --no-demangle
1530 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1531 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1532 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1533 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1534 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1535 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1536 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1537 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1538 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1539
1540 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1541 @kindex -I@var{file}
1542 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1543 @item -I@var{file}
1544 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1545 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1546 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1547 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1548 doing.
1549
1550 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1551 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1552 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1553 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1554 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1555 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1556
1557 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1558 @item --embedded-relocs
1559 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1560 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1561 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1562 targets.
1563
1564 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1565 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1566 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1567 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1568
1569 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1570 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1571 @item --fatal-warnings
1572 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1573 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1574 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1575
1576 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1577 @item --force-exe-suffix
1578 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1579
1580 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1581 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1582 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1583 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1584 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1585 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1586
1587 @kindex --gc-sections
1588 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1589 @cindex garbage collection
1590 @item --gc-sections
1591 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1592 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1593 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1594 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1595 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1596 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1597 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1598
1599 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1600 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1601 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1602 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1603 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1604 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1605 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1606 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1607 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1608
1609 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1610 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1611 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1612 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1613
1614 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1615 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1616 @cindex garbage collection
1617 @item --print-gc-sections
1618 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1619 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1620 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1621 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1622 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1623 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1624 line.
1625
1626 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1627 @cindex garbage collection
1628 @item --gc-keep-exported
1629 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1630 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1631 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1632 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1633 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1634 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1635 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1636 ELF format targets.
1637
1638 @kindex --print-output-format
1639 @cindex output format
1640 @item --print-output-format
1641 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1642 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1643 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1644
1645 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1646 @cindex memory usage
1647 @item --print-memory-usage
1648 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1649 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1650 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1651 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1652 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1653
1654 @smallexample
1655 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1656 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1657 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1658 @end smallexample
1659
1660 @cindex help
1661 @cindex usage
1662 @kindex --help
1663 @item --help
1664 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1665
1666 @kindex --target-help
1667 @item --target-help
1668 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1669
1670 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1671 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1672 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1673 @option{-M} option, above.
1674
1675 @cindex memory usage
1676 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1677 @item --no-keep-memory
1678 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1679 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1680 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1681 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1682 while linking a large executable.
1683
1684 @kindex --no-undefined
1685 @kindex -z defs
1686 @kindex -z undefs
1687 @item --no-undefined
1688 @itemx -z defs
1689 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1690 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1691 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1692 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1693 libraries being linked in.
1694
1695 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1696
1697 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1698 @kindex -z muldefs
1699 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1700 @itemx -z muldefs
1701 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1702 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1703 first definition will be used.
1704
1705 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1706 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1707 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1708 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1709 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1710 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1711 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1712 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1713 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1714
1715 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1716 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1717 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1718 a shared library.
1719
1720 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1721 libraries specified at link time are that:
1722
1723 @itemize @bullet
1724 @item
1725 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1726 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1727 resolvable at load time.
1728 @item
1729 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1730 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1731
1732 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1733 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1734 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1735 appropriate memset function.
1736 @end itemize
1737
1738 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1739 @item --no-undefined-version
1740 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1741 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1742 will be issued instead.
1743
1744 @kindex --default-symver
1745 @item --default-symver
1746 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1747 exported symbols.
1748
1749 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1750 @item --default-imported-symver
1751 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1752 imported symbols.
1753
1754 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1755 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1756 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1757 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1758 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1759 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1760 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1761 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1762 inappropriate.
1763
1764 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1765 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1766 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1767 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1768
1769 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1770 @item --no-whole-archive
1771 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1772 archive files.
1773
1774 @cindex output file after errors
1775 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1776 @item --noinhibit-exec
1777 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1778 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1779 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1780 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1781
1782 @kindex -nostdlib
1783 @item -nostdlib
1784 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1785 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1786 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1787
1788 @ifclear SingleFormat
1789 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1790 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1791 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1792 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1793 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1794 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1795 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1796 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1797 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1798 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1799 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1800 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1801 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1802 @end ifclear
1803
1804 @kindex --out-implib
1805 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1806 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1807 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1808 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1809 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1810 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1811 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1812 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1813
1814 @kindex -pie
1815 @kindex --pic-executable
1816 @item -pie
1817 @itemx --pic-executable
1818 @cindex position independent executables
1819 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1820 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1821 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1822 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1823 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1824 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1825
1826 @kindex -qmagic
1827 @item -qmagic
1828 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1829
1830 @kindex -Qy
1831 @item -Qy
1832 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1833
1834 @kindex --relax
1835 @cindex synthesizing linker
1836 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1837 @cindex --no-relax
1838 @item --relax
1839 @itemx --no-relax
1840 An option with machine dependent effects.
1841 @ifset GENERIC
1842 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1843 @end ifset
1844 @ifset H8300
1845 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1846 @end ifset
1847 @ifset XTENSA
1848 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1849 @end ifset
1850 @ifset M68HC11
1851 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1852 @end ifset
1853 @ifset NIOSII
1854 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1855 @end ifset
1856 @ifset POWERPC
1857 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1858 @end ifset
1859
1860 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1861 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1862 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1863 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1864 instructions, and combining constant values.
1865
1866 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1867 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1868 @ifset GENERIC
1869 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1870 family of processors.
1871 @end ifset
1872
1873 @ifset GENERIC
1874 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1875 but ignored.
1876 @end ifset
1877
1878 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1879 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1880
1881 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1882 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1883 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1884 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1885 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1886 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1887 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1888 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1889 @ifset GENERIC
1890 (such as VxWorks)
1891 @end ifset
1892 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1893 run-time memory.
1894
1895 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1896 or symbols needed for relocations.
1897
1898 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1899 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1900
1901 @ifset GENERIC
1902 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1903 @cindex runtime library search path
1904 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1905 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1906 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1907 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1908 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1909 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1910 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1911 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1912 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1913 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1914
1915 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1916 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1917 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1918 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1919 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1920 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1921 file systems.
1922
1923 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1924 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1925 the @option{-rpath} option.
1926 @end ifset
1927
1928 @ifset GENERIC
1929 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1930 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1931 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1932 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1933 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1934 of the input files.
1935
1936 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1937 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1938 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1939 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1940 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1941 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1942 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1943 appearing multiple times.
1944
1945 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1946 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1947 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1948 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1949 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1950
1951 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1952 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1953 supported.
1954
1955 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1956 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1957 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1958 runtime linker would do.
1959
1960 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1961 libraries:
1962 @enumerate
1963 @item
1964 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1965 @item
1966 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1967 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1968 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1969 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1970 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1971 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1972 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1973 @item
1974 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1975 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1976 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1977 @item
1978 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1979 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1980 @item
1981 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1982 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1983 @item
1984 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1985 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1986 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1987 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1988 @item
1989 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1990 @item
1991 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1992 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1993 @end enumerate
1994
1995 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1996 warning and continue with the link.
1997 @end ifset
1998
1999 @kindex -shared
2000 @kindex -Bshareable
2001 @item -shared
2002 @itemx -Bshareable
2003 @cindex shared libraries
2004 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2005 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2006 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2007 undefined symbols in the link.
2008
2009 @kindex --sort-common
2010 @item --sort-common
2011 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2012 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2013 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2014 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2015 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2016 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2017 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2018 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2019
2020 @kindex --sort-section=name
2021 @item --sort-section=name
2022 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2023 patterns in the linker script.
2024
2025 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2026 @item --sort-section=alignment
2027 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2028 patterns in the linker script.
2029
2030 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2031 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2032 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2033 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2034 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2035
2036 @kindex --split-by-file
2037 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2038 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2039 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2040 size of 1 if not given.
2041
2042 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2043 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2044 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2045 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2046 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2047 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2048 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2049 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2050 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2051 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2052 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2053 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2054
2055 @kindex --stats
2056 @item --stats
2057 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2058 as execution time and memory usage.
2059
2060 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2061 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2062 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2063 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2064 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2065
2066 @kindex --task-link
2067 @item --task-link
2068 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2069 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2070
2071 @kindex --traditional-format
2072 @cindex traditional format
2073 @item --traditional-format
2074 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2075 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2076 use the traditional format instead.
2077
2078 @cindex dbx
2079 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2080 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2081 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2082 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2083 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2084 combine duplicate entries.
2085
2086 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2087 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2088 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2089 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2090 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2091 line.
2092 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2093 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2094 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2095 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2096 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2097
2098 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2099 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2100 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2101 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2102 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2103 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2104 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2105 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2106 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2107
2108 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2109 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2110 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2111 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2112 byte of the text segment.
2113
2114 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2115 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2116 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2117 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2118 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2119 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2120
2121 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2122 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2123 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2124 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2125 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2126
2127 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2128 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2129 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2130 values for @samp{method}:
2131
2132 @table @samp
2133 @item ignore-all
2134 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2135
2136 @item report-all
2137 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2138
2139 @item ignore-in-object-files
2140 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2141 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2142
2143 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2144 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2145 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2146 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2147 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2148 command line.
2149 @end table
2150
2151 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2152 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2153
2154 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2155 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2156 can change this to a warning.
2157
2158 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2159 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2160 @item --dll-verbose
2161 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2162 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2163 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2164 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2165 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2166
2167 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2168 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2169 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2170 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2171 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2172 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2173 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2174 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2175 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2176 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2177 @xref{WIN32}.
2178
2179 @kindex --warn-common
2180 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2181 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2182 @item --warn-common
2183 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2184 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2185 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2186 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2187 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2188 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2189
2190 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2191
2192 @table @samp
2193 @item int i = 1;
2194 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2195 file.
2196
2197 @item extern int i;
2198 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2199 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2200 variable somewhere.
2201
2202 @item int i;
2203 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2204 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2205 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2206 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2207 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2208 a definition of the same variable.
2209 @end table
2210
2211 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2212 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2213 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2214 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2215 a common symbol.
2216
2217 @enumerate
2218 @item
2219 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2220 definition for the symbol.
2221 @smallexample
2222 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2223 overridden by definition
2224 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2225 @end smallexample
2226
2227 @item
2228 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2229 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2230 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2231 @smallexample
2232 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2233 overriding common
2234 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2235 @end smallexample
2236
2237 @item
2238 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2239 @smallexample
2240 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2241 of `@var{symbol}'
2242 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2243 @end smallexample
2244
2245 @item
2246 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2247 @smallexample
2248 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2249 overridden by larger common
2250 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2251 @end smallexample
2252
2253 @item
2254 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2255 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2256 encountered in a different order.
2257 @smallexample
2258 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2259 overriding smaller common
2260 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2261 @end smallexample
2262 @end enumerate
2263
2264 @kindex --warn-constructors
2265 @item --warn-constructors
2266 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2267 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2268 detect the use of global constructors.
2269
2270 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2271 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2272 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2273 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2274 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2275 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2276 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2277 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2278 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2279 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2280 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2281 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2282 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2283
2284 @kindex --warn-once
2285 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2286 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2287 @item --warn-once
2288 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2289 which refers to it.
2290
2291 @kindex --warn-section-align
2292 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2293 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2294 @item --warn-section-align
2295 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2296 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2297 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2298 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2299 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2300
2301 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2302 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2303 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2304
2305 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2306 @item --warn-alternate-em
2307 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2308
2309 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2310 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2311 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2312 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2313 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2314
2315 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2316 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2317 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2318 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2319
2320 @kindex --whole-archive
2321 @cindex including an entire archive
2322 @item --whole-archive
2323 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2324 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2325 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2326 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2327 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2328 library. This option may be used more than once.
2329
2330 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2331 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2332 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2333 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2334 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2335
2336 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2337 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2338 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2339 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2340 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2341 @var{symbol}.
2342
2343 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2344 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2345 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2346 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2347
2348 Here is a trivial example:
2349
2350 @smallexample
2351 void *
2352 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2353 @{
2354 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2355 return __real_malloc (c);
2356 @}
2357 @end smallexample
2358
2359 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2360 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2361 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2362 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2363
2364 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2365 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2366 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2367 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2368 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2369
2370 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2371 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2372 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2373 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2374 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2375 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2376 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2377
2378 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2379 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2380 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2381 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2382 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2383
2384 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2385 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2386 @item --enable-new-dtags
2387 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2388 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2389 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2390 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2391 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2392 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2393 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2394 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2395
2396 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2397 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2398 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2399 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2400 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2401 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2402 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2403
2404 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2405 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2406 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2407 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2408 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2409 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2410 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2411
2412 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2413 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2414 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2415 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2416 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2417 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2418 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2419 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2420 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2421 compressed using zlib.
2422
2423 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2424 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2425 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2426 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2427 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2428 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2429
2430 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2431 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2432
2433 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2434 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2435 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2436 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2437
2438 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2439 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2440 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2441 @option{--help} option.
2442
2443 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2444 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2445 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2446 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2447 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2448 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2449
2450 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2451 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2452 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2453 has been used.
2454
2455 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2456 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2457
2458 @kindex --build-id
2459 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2460 @item --build-id
2461 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2462 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2463 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2464 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2465 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2466 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2467 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2468 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2469 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2470 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2471 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2472
2473 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2474 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2475 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2476 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2477 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2478 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2479
2480 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2481 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2482 @end table
2483
2484 @c man end
2485
2486 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2487
2488 @c man begin OPTIONS
2489
2490 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2491 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2492 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2493 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2494 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2495 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2496 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2497 object file).
2498
2499 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2500 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2501 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2502 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2503
2504 @table @gcctabopt
2505
2506 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2507 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2508 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2509 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2510 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2511
2512 @kindex --base-file
2513 @item --base-file @var{file}
2514 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2515 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2516 @file{dlltool}.
2517 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2518
2519 @kindex --dll
2520 @item --dll
2521 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2522 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2523 file.
2524 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2525
2526 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2527 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2528 @item --enable-long-section-names
2529 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2530 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2531 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2532 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2533 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2534 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2535 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2536 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2537 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2538 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2539 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2540 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2541 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2542 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2543 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2544 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2545 image and not stripping symbols.
2546 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2547
2548 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2549 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2550 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2551 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2552 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2553 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2554 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2555 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2556 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2557 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2558 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2559 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2560 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2561 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2562 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2563 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2564 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2565 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2566
2567 @kindex --leading-underscore
2568 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2569 @item --leading-underscore
2570 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2571 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2572 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2573 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2574
2575 @cindex DLLs, creating
2576 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2577 @item --export-all-symbols
2578 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2579 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2580 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2581 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2582 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2583 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2584 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2585 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2586 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2587 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2588 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2589 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2590 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2591 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2592 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2593 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2594 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2595 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2596 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2597 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2598 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2599 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2600 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2601
2602 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2603 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2604 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2605 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2606 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2607
2608 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2609 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2610 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2611 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2612
2613 @kindex --file-alignment
2614 @item --file-alignment
2615 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2616 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2617 512.
2618 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2619
2620 @cindex heap size
2621 @kindex --heap
2622 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2623 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2624 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2625 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2626 committed.
2627 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2628
2629 @cindex image base
2630 @kindex --image-base
2631 @item --image-base @var{value}
2632 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2633 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2634 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2635 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2636 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2637 for dlls.
2638 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2639
2640 @kindex --kill-at
2641 @item --kill-at
2642 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2643 symbols before they are exported.
2644 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2645
2646 @kindex --large-address-aware
2647 @item --large-address-aware
2648 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2649 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2650 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2651 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2652 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2653 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2654
2655 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2656 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2657 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2658 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2659 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2660 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2661 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2662
2663 @kindex --major-image-version
2664 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2665 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2666 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2667
2668 @kindex --major-os-version
2669 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2670 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2671 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2672
2673 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2674 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2675 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2676 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2677
2678 @kindex --minor-image-version
2679 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2680 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2681 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2682
2683 @kindex --minor-os-version
2684 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2685 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2686 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2687
2688 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2689 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2690 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2691 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2692
2693 @cindex DEF files, creating
2694 @cindex DLLs, creating
2695 @kindex --output-def
2696 @item --output-def @var{file}
2697 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2698 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2699 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2700 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2701 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2702 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2703
2704 @cindex DLLs, creating
2705 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2706 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2707 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2708 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2709 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2710 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2711 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2712 execution are avoided.
2713 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2714
2715 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2716 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2717 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2718 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2719 default.
2720 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2721
2722 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2723 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2724 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2725 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2726 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2727 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2728 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2729 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2730 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2731 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2732
2733 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2734 @item --enable-auto-import
2735 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2736 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2737 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2738 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2739
2740 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2741 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2742
2743 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2744 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2745 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2746
2747 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2748 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2749 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2750 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2751 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2752
2753 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2754 see this message:
2755
2756 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2757 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2758
2759 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2760 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2761 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2762 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2763 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2764 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2765 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2766 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2767 the warning, and exit.
2768
2769 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2770 data type of the exported variable:
2771
2772 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2773 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2774 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2775
2776 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2777 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2778 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2779 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2780
2781 @example
2782 extern type extern_array[];
2783 extern_array[1] -->
2784 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2785 @end example
2786
2787 or
2788
2789 @example
2790 extern type extern_array[];
2791 extern_array[1] -->
2792 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2793 @end example
2794
2795 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2796 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2797
2798 @example
2799 extern struct s extern_struct;
2800 extern_struct.field -->
2801 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2802 @end example
2803
2804 or
2805
2806 @example
2807 extern long long extern_ll;
2808 extern_ll -->
2809 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2810 @end example
2811
2812 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2813 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2814 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2815 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2816 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2817 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2818 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2819 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2820
2821 Original:
2822 @example
2823 --foo.h
2824 extern int arr[];
2825 --foo.c
2826 #include "foo.h"
2827 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2828 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2829 @}
2830 @end example
2831
2832 Solution 1:
2833 @example
2834 --foo.h
2835 extern int arr[];
2836 --foo.c
2837 #include "foo.h"
2838 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2839 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2840 volatile int *parr = arr;
2841 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2842 @}
2843 @end example
2844
2845 Solution 2:
2846 @example
2847 --foo.h
2848 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2849 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2850 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2851 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2852 #else
2853 #define FOO_IMPORT
2854 #endif
2855 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2856 --foo.c
2857 #include "foo.h"
2858 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2859 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2860 @}
2861 @end example
2862
2863 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2864 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2865 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2866 functions).
2867
2868 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2869 @item --disable-auto-import
2870 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2871 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2872 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2873
2874 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2875 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2876 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2877 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2878 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2879 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2880 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2881
2882 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2883 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2884 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2885 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2886
2887 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2888 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2889 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2890 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2891
2892 @kindex --section-alignment
2893 @item --section-alignment
2894 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2895 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2896 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2897
2898 @cindex stack size
2899 @kindex --stack
2900 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2901 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2902 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2903 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2904 committed.
2905 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2906
2907 @kindex --subsystem
2908 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2909 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2910 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2911 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2912 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2913 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2914 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2915 @var{which}.
2916 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2917
2918 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2919 of the PE file header:
2920 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2921
2922 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2923 @item --high-entropy-va
2924 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2925 (ASLR).
2926
2927 @kindex --dynamicbase
2928 @item --dynamicbase
2929 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2930 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2931 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2932
2933 @kindex --forceinteg
2934 @item --forceinteg
2935 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2936
2937 @kindex --nxcompat
2938 @item --nxcompat
2939 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2940 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2941
2942 @kindex --no-isolation
2943 @item --no-isolation
2944 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2945
2946 @kindex --no-seh
2947 @item --no-seh
2948 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2949 this image.
2950
2951 @kindex --no-bind
2952 @item --no-bind
2953 Do not bind this image.
2954
2955 @kindex --wdmdriver
2956 @item --wdmdriver
2957 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2958
2959 @kindex --tsaware
2960 @item --tsaware
2961 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2962
2963 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2964 @item --insert-timestamp
2965 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2966 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2967 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2968 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2969 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2970 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2971 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2972 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2973 identically.
2974 @end table
2975
2976 @c man end
2977
2978 @ifset C6X
2979 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2980
2981 @c man begin OPTIONS
2982
2983 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2984 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2985 all executables use an index of 0.
2986
2987 @table @gcctabopt
2988
2989 @kindex --dsbt-size
2990 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2991 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2992 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2993 entries.
2994
2995 @kindex --dsbt-index
2996 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2997 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2998 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2999 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3000 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3001
3002 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3003 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3004 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3005
3006 @end table
3007
3008 @c man end
3009 @end ifset
3010
3011 @ifset M68HC11
3012 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3013
3014 @c man begin OPTIONS
3015
3016 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3017 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3018
3019 @table @gcctabopt
3020
3021 @kindex --no-trampoline
3022 @item --no-trampoline
3023 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3024 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3025 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3026
3027 @kindex --bank-window
3028 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3029 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3030 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3031 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3032 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3033
3034 @end table
3035
3036 @c man end
3037 @end ifset
3038
3039 @ifset M68K
3040 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3041
3042 @c man begin OPTIONS
3043
3044 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3045 when linking for 68K targets.
3046
3047 @table @gcctabopt
3048
3049 @kindex --got
3050 @item --got=@var{type}
3051 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3052 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3053 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3054 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3055
3056 @end table
3057
3058 @c man end
3059 @end ifset
3060
3061 @ifset MIPS
3062 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3063
3064 @c man begin OPTIONS
3065
3066 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3067 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3068 linking for MIPS targets.
3069
3070 @table @gcctabopt
3071
3072 @kindex --insn32
3073 @item --insn32
3074 @kindex --no-insn32
3075 @itemx --no-insn32
3076 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3077 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3078 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3079 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3080 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3081 possible.
3082
3083 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3084 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3085 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3086 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3087 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3088 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3089 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3090 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3091 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3092 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3093 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3094 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3095 an error.
3096
3097 @end table
3098
3099 @c man end
3100 @end ifset
3101
3102 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3103 @node Environment
3104 @section Environment Variables
3105
3106 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3107
3108 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3109 @ifclear SingleFormat
3110 @code{GNUTARGET},
3111 @end ifclear
3112 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3113
3114 @ifclear SingleFormat
3115 @kindex GNUTARGET
3116 @cindex default input format
3117 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3118 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3119 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3120 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3121 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3122 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3123 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3124 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3125 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3126 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3127 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3128 @end ifclear
3129
3130 @kindex LDEMULATION
3131 @cindex default emulation
3132 @cindex emulation, default
3133 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3134 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3135 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3136 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3137 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3138 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3139 linker was configured.
3140
3141 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3142 @cindex demangling, default
3143 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3144 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3145 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3146 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3147 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3148 options.
3149
3150 @c man end
3151 @end ifset
3152
3153 @node Scripts
3154 @chapter Linker Scripts
3155
3156 @cindex scripts
3157 @cindex linker scripts
3158 @cindex command files
3159 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3160 written in the linker command language.
3161
3162 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3163 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3164 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3165 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3166 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3167 described below.
3168
3169 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3170 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3171 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3172 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3173 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3174
3175 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3176 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3177 default linker script.
3178
3179 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3180 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3181 Linker Scripts}.
3182
3183 @menu
3184 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3185 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3186 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3187 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3188 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3189 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3190 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3191 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3192 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3193 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3194 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3195 @end menu
3196
3197 @node Basic Script Concepts
3198 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3199 @cindex linker script concepts
3200 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3201 describe the linker script language.
3202
3203 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3204 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3205 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3206 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3207 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3208 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3209 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3210 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3211
3212 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3213 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3214 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3215 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3216 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3217 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3218 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3219 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3220 of debugging information.
3221
3222 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3223 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3224 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3225 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3226 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3227 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3228 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3229 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3230 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3231 RAM address would be the VMA.
3232
3233 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3234 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3235
3236 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3237 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3238 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3239 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3240 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3241 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3242 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3243
3244 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3245 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3246 option.
3247
3248 @node Script Format
3249 @section Linker Script Format
3250 @cindex linker script format
3251 Linker scripts are text files.
3252
3253 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3254 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3255 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3256 generally ignored.
3257
3258 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3259 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3260 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3261 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3262 file name.
3263
3264 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3265 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3266 to whitespace.
3267
3268 @node Simple Example
3269 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3270 @cindex linker script example
3271 @cindex example of linker script
3272 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3273
3274 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3275 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3276 memory layout of the output file.
3277
3278 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3279 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3280 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3281 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3282 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3283 your input files.
3284
3285 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3286 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3287 linker script which will do that:
3288 @smallexample
3289 SECTIONS
3290 @{
3291 . = 0x10000;
3292 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3293 . = 0x8000000;
3294 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3295 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3296 @}
3297 @end smallexample
3298
3299 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3300 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3301 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3302
3303 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3304 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3305 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3306 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3307 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3308 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3309 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3310
3311 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3312 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3313 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3314 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3315 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3316 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3317
3318 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3319 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3320 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3321
3322 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3323 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3324 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3325 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3326 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3327 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3328 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3329
3330 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3331 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3332 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3333 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3334 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3335 sections.
3336
3337 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3338
3339 @node Simple Commands
3340 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3341 @cindex linker script simple commands
3342 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3343
3344 @menu
3345 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3346 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3347 @ifclear SingleFormat
3348 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3349 @end ifclear
3350
3351 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3352 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3353 @end menu
3354
3355 @node Entry Point
3356 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3357 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3358 @cindex start of execution
3359 @cindex first instruction
3360 @cindex entry point
3361 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3362 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3363 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3364 @smallexample
3365 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3366 @end smallexample
3367
3368 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3369 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3370 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3371 @itemize @bullet
3372 @item
3373 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3374 @item
3375 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3376 @item
3377 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3378 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3379 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3380 @item
3381 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3382 @item
3383 The address @code{0}.
3384 @end itemize
3385
3386 @node File Commands
3387 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3388 @cindex linker script file commands
3389 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3390
3391 @table @code
3392 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3393 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3394 @cindex including a linker script
3395 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3396 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3397 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3398 10 levels deep.
3399
3400 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3401 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3402
3403 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3404 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3405 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3406 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3407 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3408 @cindex linker script input object files
3409 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3410 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3411
3412 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3413 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3414 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3415
3416 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3417 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3418
3419 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3420 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3421 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3422 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3423 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3424 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3425 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3426 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3427 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3428 @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3429
3430 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3431 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3432 @samp{-l}.
3433
3434 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3435 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3436 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3437
3438 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3439 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3440 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3441 @cindex grouping input files
3442 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3443 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3444 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3445 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3446
3447 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3448 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3449 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3450 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3451 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3452 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3453 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3454 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3455 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3456 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3457 setting afterwards.
3458
3459 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3460 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3461 @cindex output file name in linker script
3462 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3463 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3464 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3465 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3466 precedence.
3467
3468 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3469 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3470
3471 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3472 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3473 @cindex library search path in linker script
3474 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3475 @cindex search path in linker script
3476 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3477 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3478 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3479 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3480 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3481 the command line option are searched first.
3482
3483 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3484 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3485 @cindex first input file
3486 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3487 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3488 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3489 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3490 first file.
3491 @end table
3492
3493 @ifclear SingleFormat
3494 @node Format Commands
3495 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3496 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3497
3498 @table @code
3499 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3500 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3501 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3502 @cindex output file format in linker script
3503 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3504 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3505 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3506 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3507 line option takes precedence.
3508
3509 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3510 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3511 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3512 desired endianness.
3513
3514 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3515 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3516 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3517 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3518
3519 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3520 command:
3521 @smallexample
3522 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3523 @end smallexample
3524 This says that the default format for the output file is
3525 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3526 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3527 format.
3528
3529 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3530 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3531 @cindex input file format in linker script
3532 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3533 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3534 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3535 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3536 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3537 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3538 @end table
3539 @end ifclear
3540
3541 @node REGION_ALIAS
3542 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3543 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3544 @cindex region alias
3545 @cindex region names
3546
3547 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3548 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3549
3550 @smallexample
3551 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3552 @end smallexample
3553
3554 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3555 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3556 to memory regions. An example follows.
3557
3558 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3559 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3560 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3561 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3562 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3563 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3564 sections:
3565
3566 @itemize @bullet
3567 @item
3568 @code{.text} program code;
3569 @item
3570 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3571 @item
3572 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3573 @item
3574 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3575 @end itemize
3576
3577 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3578 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3579 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3580 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3581 @code{C}:
3582 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3583 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3584 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3585 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3586 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3587 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3588 @end multitable
3589 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3590 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3591 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3592 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3593
3594 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3595 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3596 memory layout:
3597 @smallexample
3598 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3599
3600 SECTIONS
3601 @{
3602 .text :
3603 @{
3604 *(.text)
3605 @} > REGION_TEXT
3606 .rodata :
3607 @{
3608 *(.rodata)
3609 rodata_end = .;
3610 @} > REGION_RODATA
3611 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3612 @{
3613 data_start = .;
3614 *(.data)
3615 @} > REGION_DATA
3616 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3617 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3618 .bss :
3619 @{
3620 *(.bss)
3621 @} > REGION_BSS
3622 @}
3623 @end smallexample
3624
3625 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3626 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3627 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3628 @table @code
3629 @item A
3630 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3631 @smallexample
3632 MEMORY
3633 @{
3634 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3635 @}
3636
3637 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3638 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3639 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3640 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3641 @end smallexample
3642 @item B
3643 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3644 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3645 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3646 @smallexample
3647 MEMORY
3648 @{
3649 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3650 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3651 @}
3652
3653 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3654 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3655 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3656 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3657 @end smallexample
3658 @item C
3659 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3660 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3661 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3662 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3663 @smallexample
3664 MEMORY
3665 @{
3666 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3667 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3668 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3669 @}
3670
3671 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3672 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3673 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3674 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3675 @end smallexample
3676 @end table
3677
3678 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3679 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3680 necessary:
3681 @smallexample
3682 #include <string.h>
3683
3684 extern char data_start [];
3685 extern char data_size [];
3686 extern char data_load_start [];
3687
3688 void copy_data(void)
3689 @{
3690 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3691 @{
3692 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3693 @}
3694 @}
3695 @end smallexample
3696
3697 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3698 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3699 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3700
3701 @table @code
3702 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3703 @kindex ASSERT
3704 @cindex assertion in linker script
3705 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3706 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3707
3708 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3709 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3710 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3711 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3712 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3713
3714 @smallexample
3715 .stack :
3716 @{
3717 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3718 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3719 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3720 @}
3721 @end smallexample
3722
3723 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3724 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3725 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3726
3727 @smallexample
3728 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3729 .stack :
3730 @{
3731 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3732 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3733 @}
3734 @end smallexample
3735
3736 will work.
3737
3738 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3739 @kindex EXTERN
3740 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3741 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3742 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3743 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3744 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3745 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3746
3747 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3748 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3749 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3750 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3751 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3752 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3753
3754 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3755 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3756 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3757 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3758 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3759 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3760
3761 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3762 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3763 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3764 @cindex section groups
3765 @cindex COMDAT
3766 This command has the same effect as the
3767 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3768 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3769 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3770 specified (@samp{-r}).
3771
3772 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3773 @kindex INSERT
3774 @cindex insert user script into default script
3775 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3776 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3777 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3778 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3779 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3780 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3781 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3782 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3783 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3784 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3785 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3786 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3787 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3788
3789 @smallexample
3790 SECTIONS
3791 @{
3792 OVERLAY :
3793 @{
3794 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3795 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3796 @}
3797 @}
3798 INSERT AFTER .text;
3799 @end smallexample
3800
3801 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3802 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3803 @cindex cross references
3804 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3805 references among certain output sections.
3806
3807 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3808 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3809 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3810 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3811 a function defined in the other section.
3812
3813 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3814 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3815 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3816 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3817 names.
3818
3819 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3820 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3821 @cindex cross references
3822 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3823 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3824
3825 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3826 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3827 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3828 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3829 must never call back.
3830
3831 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3832 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3833 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3834 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3835 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3836 names, not input section names.
3837
3838 @ifclear SingleFormat
3839 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3840 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3841 @cindex machine architecture
3842 @cindex architecture
3843 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3844 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3845 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3846 the @samp{-f} option.
3847 @end ifclear
3848
3849 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3850 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3851 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3852 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3853 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3854 @xref{Expression Section}.
3855 @end table
3856
3857 @node Assignments
3858 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3859 @cindex assignment in scripts
3860 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3861 @cindex variables, defining
3862 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3863 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3864
3865 @menu
3866 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3867 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3868 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3869 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3870 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3871 @end menu
3872
3873 @node Simple Assignments
3874 @subsection Simple Assignments
3875
3876 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3877
3878 @table @code
3879 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3880 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3881 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3882 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3883 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3884 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3885 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3886 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3887 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3888 @end table
3889
3890 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3891 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3892 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3893
3894 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3895 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3896
3897 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3898
3899 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3900
3901 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3902 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3903 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3904
3905 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3906 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3907
3908 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3909 assignments may be used:
3910
3911 @smallexample
3912 floating_point = 0;
3913 SECTIONS
3914 @{
3915 .text :
3916 @{
3917 *(.text)
3918 _etext = .;
3919 @}
3920 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3921 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3922 @}
3923 @end smallexample
3924 @noindent
3925 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3926 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3927 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3928 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3929 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3930
3931 @node HIDDEN
3932 @subsection HIDDEN
3933 @cindex HIDDEN
3934 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3935 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3936
3937 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3938 @code{HIDDEN}:
3939
3940 @smallexample
3941 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3942 SECTIONS
3943 @{
3944 .text :
3945 @{
3946 *(.text)
3947 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3948 @}
3949 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3950 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3951 @}
3952 @end smallexample
3953 @noindent
3954 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3955
3956 @node PROVIDE
3957 @subsection PROVIDE
3958 @cindex PROVIDE
3959 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3960 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3961 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3962 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3963 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3964 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3965 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3966 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3967
3968 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3969 @smallexample
3970 SECTIONS
3971 @{
3972 .text :
3973 @{
3974 *(.text)
3975 _etext = .;
3976 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3977 @}
3978 @}
3979 @end smallexample
3980
3981 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3982 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3983 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3984 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3985 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3986 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3987
3988 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
3989 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
3990 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
3991 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
3992 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
3993
3994 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3995 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3996 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3997 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3998 hidden and won't be exported.
3999
4000 @node Source Code Reference
4001 @subsection Source Code Reference
4002
4003 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4004 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4005 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4006 symbol that does not have a value.
4007
4008 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4009 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4010 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4011 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4012 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4013 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4014 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4015 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4016
4017 @smallexample
4018 extern int foo;
4019 @end smallexample
4020
4021 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4022
4023 @smallexample
4024 _foo = 1000;
4025 @end smallexample
4026
4027 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4028 transformation has taken place.
4029
4030 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4031 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4032 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4033 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4034 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4035 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4036 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4037
4038 @smallexample
4039 int foo = 1000;
4040 @end smallexample
4041
4042 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4043 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4044 number 1000 is initially stored.
4045
4046 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4047 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4048 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4049 So:
4050
4051 @smallexample
4052 foo = 1;
4053 @end smallexample
4054
4055 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4056 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4057 address. Whereas:
4058
4059 @smallexample
4060 int * a = & foo;
4061 @end smallexample
4062
4063 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4064 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4065 the variable @samp{a}.
4066
4067 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4068 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4069 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4070
4071 @smallexample
4072 foo = 1000;
4073 @end smallexample
4074
4075 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4076 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4077 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4078 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4079 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4080
4081 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4082 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4083 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4084 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4085 linker script contains these declarations:
4086
4087 @smallexample
4088 @group
4089 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4090 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4091 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4092 @end group
4093 @end smallexample
4094
4095 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4096
4097 @smallexample
4098 @group
4099 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4100
4101 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4102 @end group
4103 @end smallexample
4104
4105 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4106 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4107 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4108
4109 @smallexample
4110 @group
4111 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4112
4113 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4114 @end group
4115 @end smallexample
4116
4117 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4118 operators.
4119
4120 @node SECTIONS
4121 @section SECTIONS Command
4122 @kindex SECTIONS
4123 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4124 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4125
4126 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4127 @smallexample
4128 SECTIONS
4129 @{
4130 @var{sections-command}
4131 @var{sections-command}
4132 @dots{}
4133 @}
4134 @end smallexample
4135
4136 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4137
4138 @itemize @bullet
4139 @item
4140 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4141 @item
4142 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4143 @item
4144 an output section description
4145 @item
4146 an overlay description
4147 @end itemize
4148
4149 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4150 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4151 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4152 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4153 the layout of the output file.
4154
4155 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4156 below.
4157
4158 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4159 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4160 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4161 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4162 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4163 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4164
4165 @menu
4166 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4167 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4168 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4169 * Input Section:: Input section description
4170 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4171 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4172 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4173 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4174 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4175 @end menu
4176
4177 @node Output Section Description
4178 @subsection Output Section Description
4179 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4180 @smallexample
4181 @group
4182 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4183 [AT(@var{lma})]
4184 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4185 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4186 [@var{constraint}]
4187 @{
4188 @var{output-section-command}
4189 @var{output-section-command}
4190 @dots{}
4191 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4192 @end group
4193 @end smallexample
4194
4195 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4196
4197 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4198 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4199 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4200 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4201 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4202
4203 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4204
4205 @itemize @bullet
4206 @item
4207 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4208 @item
4209 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4210 @item
4211 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4212 @item
4213 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4214 @end itemize
4215
4216 @node Output Section Name
4217 @subsection Output Section Name
4218 @cindex name, section
4219 @cindex section name
4220 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4221 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4222 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4223 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4224 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4225 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4226 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4227 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4228 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4229 commas must be quoted.
4230
4231 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4232 Discarding}.
4233
4234 @node Output Section Address
4235 @subsection Output Section Address
4236 @cindex address, section
4237 @cindex section address
4238 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4239 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4240 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4241
4242 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4243 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4244 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4245 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4246 contained within the output section.
4247
4248 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4249
4250 @itemize @bullet
4251 @item
4252 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4253 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4254 in that region.
4255
4256 @item
4257 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4258 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4259 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4260 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4261
4262 @item
4263 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4264 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4265 counter.
4266 @end itemize
4267
4268 @noindent
4269 For example:
4270
4271 @smallexample
4272 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4273 @end smallexample
4274
4275 @noindent
4276 and
4277
4278 @smallexample
4279 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4280 @end smallexample
4281
4282 @noindent
4283 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4284 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4285 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4286 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4287 input sections.
4288
4289 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4290 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4291 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4292 do something like this:
4293 @smallexample
4294 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4295 @end smallexample
4296 @noindent
4297 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4298 aligned upward to the specified value.
4299
4300 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4301 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4302 sections are ignored).
4303
4304 @node Input Section
4305 @subsection Input Section Description
4306 @cindex input sections
4307 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4308 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4309
4310 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4311 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4312 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4313 map the input files into your memory layout.
4314
4315 @menu
4316 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4317 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4318 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4319 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4320 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4321 @end menu
4322
4323 @node Input Section Basics
4324 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4325 @cindex input section basics
4326 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4327 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4328
4329 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4330 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4331
4332 The most common input section description is to include all input
4333 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4334 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4335 @smallexample
4336 *(.text)
4337 @end smallexample
4338 @noindent
4339 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4340 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4341 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4342 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4343 example:
4344 @smallexample
4345 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4346 @end smallexample
4347 @noindent
4348 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4349 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4350 placed inside the section list, for example:
4351 @smallexample
4352 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4353 @end smallexample
4354 @noindent
4355 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4356 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4357 more than one section, as described below.
4358
4359 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4360 @smallexample
4361 *(.text .rdata)
4362 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4363 @end smallexample
4364 @noindent
4365 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4366 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4367 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4368 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4369 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4370 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4371
4372 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4373 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4374 immediately following section, for example:
4375 @smallexample
4376 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4377 @end smallexample
4378 @noindent
4379 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4380 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4381 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4382 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4383 could be modified to:
4384 @smallexample
4385 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4386 @end smallexample
4387 @noindent
4388 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4389 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4390 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4391 @smallexample
4392 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4393 @end smallexample
4394
4395 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4396 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4397 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4398 @smallexample
4399 data.o(.data)
4400 @end smallexample
4401
4402 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4403 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4404
4405 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4406
4407 @smallexample
4408 @group
4409 SECTIONS @{
4410 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4411 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4412 @}
4413 @end group
4414 @end smallexample
4415
4416 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4417 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4418 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4419 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4420 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4421
4422 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4423 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4424 with no whitespace around the colon.
4425
4426 @table @samp
4427 @item archive:file
4428 matches file within archive
4429 @item archive:
4430 matches the whole archive
4431 @item :file
4432 matches file but not one in an archive
4433 @end table
4434
4435 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4436 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4437 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4438 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4439 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4440 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4441 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4442 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4443 command.
4444
4445 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4446 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4447 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4448 @smallexample
4449 data.o
4450 @end smallexample
4451
4452 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4453 and does not contain any wild card
4454 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4455 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4456 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4457 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4458 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4459 the archive search path.
4460
4461 @node Input Section Wildcards
4462 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4463 @cindex input section wildcards
4464 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4465 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4466 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4467 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4468 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4469
4470 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4471 pattern for the file name.
4472
4473 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4474
4475 @table @samp
4476 @item *
4477 matches any number of characters
4478 @item ?
4479 matches any single character
4480 @item [@var{chars}]
4481 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4482 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4483 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4484 @item \
4485 quotes the following character
4486 @end table
4487
4488 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4489 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4490 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4491 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4492 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4493 a @samp{/} character.
4494
4495 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4496 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4497 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4498
4499 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4500 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4501 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4502 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4503 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4504 @smallexample
4505 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4506 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4507 @end smallexample
4508
4509 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4510 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4511 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4512 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4513 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4514 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4515 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4516
4517 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4518 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4519 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4520 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4521 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4522 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4523
4524 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4525 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4526 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4527 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4528 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4529
4530 @cindex SORT
4531 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4532
4533 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4534 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4535
4536 @enumerate
4537 @item
4538 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4539 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4540 sections have the same name.
4541 @item
4542 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4543 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4544 sections have the same alignment.
4545 @item
4546 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4547 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4548 @item
4549 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4550 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4551 @item
4552 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4553 @end enumerate
4554
4555 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4556 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4557 takes precedence over the command line option.
4558
4559 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4560 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4561 treated as nested sorting command.
4562
4563 @enumerate
4564 @item
4565 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4566 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4567 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4568 @item
4569 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4570 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4571 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4572 @end enumerate
4573
4574 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4575 command line option will be ignored.
4576
4577 @cindex SORT_NONE
4578 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4579 section sorting option.
4580
4581 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4582 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4583 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4584
4585 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4586 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4587 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4588 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4589 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4590 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4591 @smallexample
4592 @group
4593 SECTIONS @{
4594 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4595 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4596 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4597 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4598 @}
4599 @end group
4600 @end smallexample
4601
4602 @node Input Section Common
4603 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4604 @cindex common symbol placement
4605 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4606 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4607 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4608 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4609 named @samp{COMMON}.
4610
4611 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4612 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4613 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4614 input files are placed in another section.
4615
4616 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4617 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4618 @smallexample
4619 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4620 @end smallexample
4621
4622 @cindex scommon section
4623 @cindex small common symbols
4624 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4625 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4626 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4627 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4628 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4629 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4630 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4631 locations.
4632
4633 @cindex [COMMON]
4634 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4635 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4636 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4637
4638 @node Input Section Keep
4639 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4640 @cindex KEEP
4641 @cindex garbage collection
4642 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4643 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4644 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4645 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4646 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4647
4648 @node Input Section Example
4649 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4650 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4651 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4652 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4653 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4654 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4655 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4656 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4657 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4658 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4659
4660 @smallexample
4661 @group
4662 SECTIONS @{
4663 outputa 0x10000 :
4664 @{
4665 all.o
4666 foo.o (.input1)
4667 @}
4668 @end group
4669 @group
4670 outputb :
4671 @{
4672 foo.o (.input2)
4673 foo1.o (.input1)
4674 @}
4675 @end group
4676 @group
4677 outputc :
4678 @{
4679 *(.input1)
4680 *(.input2)
4681 @}
4682 @}
4683 @end group
4684 @end smallexample
4685
4686 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4687 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4688 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4689 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4690 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4691 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4692 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4693
4694 @node Output Section Data
4695 @subsection Output Section Data
4696 @cindex data
4697 @cindex section data
4698 @cindex output section data
4699 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4700 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4701 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4702 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4703 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4704 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4705 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4706 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4707 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4708 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4709 counter.
4710
4711 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4712 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4713 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4714 stored.
4715
4716 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4717 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4718 @smallexample
4719 BYTE(1)
4720 LONG(addr)
4721 @end smallexample
4722
4723 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4724 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4725 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4726 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4727 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4728
4729 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4730 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4731 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4732 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4733 endianness of the first input object file.
4734
4735 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4736 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4737 @smallexample
4738 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4739 @end smallexample
4740 whereas this will work:
4741 @smallexample
4742 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4743 @end smallexample
4744
4745 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4746 @cindex holes, filling
4747 @cindex unspecified memory
4748 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4749 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4750 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4751 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4752 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4753 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4754 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4755 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4756 different parts of an output section.
4757
4758 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4759 value @samp{0x90}:
4760 @smallexample
4761 FILL(0x90909090)
4762 @end smallexample
4763
4764 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4765 section attribute, but it only affects the
4766 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4767 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4768 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4769 expression.
4770
4771 @node Output Section Keywords
4772 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4773 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4774 commands.
4775
4776 @table @code
4777 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4778 @cindex input filename symbols
4779 @cindex filename symbols
4780 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4781 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4782 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4783 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4784 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4785
4786 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4787 normally used for any other object file format.
4788
4789 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4790 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4791 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4792 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4793 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4794 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4795 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4796 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4797 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4798 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4799 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4800 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4801 ignored for other object file formats.
4802
4803 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4804 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4805 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4806 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4807 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4808 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4809 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4810 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4811 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4812 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4813 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4814 @code{exit}.
4815
4816 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4817 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4818 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4819 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4820 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4821 runtime code expects to see.
4822
4823 @smallexample
4824 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4825 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4826 *(.ctors)
4827 LONG(0)
4828 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4829 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4830 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4831 *(.dtors)
4832 LONG(0)
4833 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4834 @end smallexample
4835
4836 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4837 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4838 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4839 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4840 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4841 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4842 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4843 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4844
4845 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4846 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4847 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4848 scripts.
4849
4850 @end table
4851
4852 @node Output Section Discarding
4853 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4854 @cindex discarding sections
4855 @cindex sections, discarding
4856 @cindex removing sections
4857 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4858 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4859 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4860 @smallexample
4861 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4862 @end smallexample
4863 @noindent
4864 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4865 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4866 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4867 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4868 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4869 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4870 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4871 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4872 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4873
4874 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4875 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4876 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4877 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4878 section is discarded.
4879
4880 @cindex /DISCARD/
4881 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4882 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4883 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4884
4885 @node Output Section Attributes
4886 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4887 @cindex output section attributes
4888 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4889 like this:
4890
4891 @smallexample
4892 @group
4893 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4894 [AT(@var{lma})]
4895 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4896 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4897 [@var{constraint}]
4898 @{
4899 @var{output-section-command}
4900 @var{output-section-command}
4901 @dots{}
4902 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4903 @end group
4904 @end smallexample
4905
4906 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4907 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4908 remaining section attributes.
4909
4910 @menu
4911 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4912 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4913 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4914 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4915 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4916 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4917 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4918 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4919 @end menu
4920
4921 @node Output Section Type
4922 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4923 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4924 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4925
4926 @table @code
4927 @item NOLOAD
4928 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4929 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4930 @item DSECT
4931 @itemx COPY
4932 @itemx INFO
4933 @itemx OVERLAY
4934 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4935 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4936 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4937 section when the program is run.
4938 @end table
4939
4940 @kindex NOLOAD
4941 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4942 @cindex loading, preventing
4943 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4944 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4945 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4946 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4947 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4948 @smallexample
4949 @group
4950 SECTIONS @{
4951 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4952 @dots{}
4953 @}
4954 @end group
4955 @end smallexample
4956
4957 @node Output Section LMA
4958 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4959 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4960 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4961 @cindex load address
4962 @cindex section load address
4963 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4964 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4965 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4966 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4967 address is optional.
4968
4969 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4970 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4971 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4972 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4973 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4974
4975 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4976 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4977 load address:
4978
4979 @itemize @bullet
4980 @item
4981 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4982 the LMA address as well.
4983
4984 @item
4985 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4986
4987 @item
4988 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4989 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4990 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4991 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4992 the last section in the located region.
4993
4994 @item
4995 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4996 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4997
4998 @item
4999 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5000 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5001 @end itemize
5002
5003 @cindex ROM initialized data
5004 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5005 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5006 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5007 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5008 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5009 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5010 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5011 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5012 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5013
5014 @smallexample
5015 @group
5016 SECTIONS
5017 @{
5018 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5019 .mdata 0x2000 :
5020 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5021 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5022 .bss 0x3000 :
5023 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5024 @}
5025 @end group
5026 @end smallexample
5027
5028 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5029 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5030 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5031 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5032 script.
5033
5034 @smallexample
5035 @group
5036 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5037 char *src = &_etext;
5038 char *dst = &_data;
5039
5040 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5041 while (dst < &_edata)
5042 *dst++ = *src++;
5043
5044 /* Zero bss. */
5045 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5046 *dst = 0;
5047 @end group
5048 @end smallexample
5049
5050 @node Forced Output Alignment
5051 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5052 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5053 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5054 @cindex output section alignment
5055 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5056 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5057 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5058
5059 @node Forced Input Alignment
5060 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5061 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5062 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5063 @cindex input section alignment
5064 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5065 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5066 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5067
5068 @node Output Section Constraint
5069 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5070 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5071 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5072 @cindex constraints on output sections
5073 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5074 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5075 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5076 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5077
5078 @node Output Section Region
5079 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5080 @kindex >@var{region}
5081 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5082 @cindex memory regions and sections
5083 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5084 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5085
5086 Here is a simple example:
5087 @smallexample
5088 @group
5089 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5090 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5091 @end group
5092 @end smallexample
5093
5094 @node Output Section Phdr
5095 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5096 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5097 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5098 @cindex program headers and sections
5099 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5100 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5101 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5102 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5103 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5104 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5105
5106 Here is a simple example:
5107 @smallexample
5108 @group
5109 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5110 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5111 @end group
5112 @end smallexample
5113
5114 @node Output Section Fill
5115 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5116 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5117 @cindex section fill pattern
5118 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5119 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5120 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5121 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5122 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5123 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5124 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5125 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5126 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5127 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5128 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5129 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5130 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5131
5132 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5133 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5134
5135 Here is a simple example:
5136 @smallexample
5137 @group
5138 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5139 @end group
5140 @end smallexample
5141
5142 @node Overlay Description
5143 @subsection Overlay Description
5144 @kindex OVERLAY
5145 @cindex overlays
5146 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5147 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5148 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5149 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5150 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5151 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5152 than another.
5153
5154 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5155 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5156 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5157 command is as follows:
5158 @smallexample
5159 @group
5160 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5161 @{
5162 @var{secname1}
5163 @{
5164 @var{output-section-command}
5165 @var{output-section-command}
5166 @dots{}
5167 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5168 @var{secname2}
5169 @{
5170 @var{output-section-command}
5171 @var{output-section-command}
5172 @dots{}
5173 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5174 @dots{}
5175 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5176 @end group
5177 @end smallexample
5178
5179 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5180 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5181 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5182 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5183 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5184 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5185
5186 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5187 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5188
5189 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5190 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5191 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5192 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5193 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5194 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5195
5196 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5197 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5198 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5199 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5200 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5201
5202 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5203 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5204 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5205 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5206 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5207 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5208 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5209
5210 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5211 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5212
5213 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5214 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5215 @smallexample
5216 @group
5217 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5218 @{
5219 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5220 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5221 @}
5222 @end group
5223 @end smallexample
5224 @noindent
5225 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5226 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5227 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5228 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5229 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5230 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5231
5232 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5233 like the following.
5234
5235 @smallexample
5236 @group
5237 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5238 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5239 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5240 @end group
5241 @end smallexample
5242
5243 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5244 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5245 example could have been written identically as follows.
5246
5247 @smallexample
5248 @group
5249 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5250 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5251 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5252 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5253 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5254 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5255 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5256 @end group
5257 @end smallexample
5258
5259 @node MEMORY
5260 @section MEMORY Command
5261 @kindex MEMORY
5262 @cindex memory regions
5263 @cindex regions of memory
5264 @cindex allocating memory
5265 @cindex discontinuous memory
5266 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5267 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5268
5269 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5270 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5271 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5272 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5273 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5274 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5275 around to fit into the available regions.
5276
5277 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5278 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5279 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5280 @code{MEMORY} is:
5281 @smallexample
5282 @group
5283 MEMORY
5284 @{
5285 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5286 @dots{}
5287 @}
5288 @end group
5289 @end smallexample
5290
5291 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5292 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5293 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5294 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5295 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5296 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5297 command.
5298
5299 @cindex memory region attributes
5300 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5301 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5302 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5303 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5304 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5305 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5306 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5307
5308 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5309 @table @samp
5310 @item R
5311 Read-only section
5312 @item W
5313 Read/write section
5314 @item X
5315 Executable section
5316 @item A
5317 Allocatable section
5318 @item I
5319 Initialized section
5320 @item L
5321 Same as @samp{I}
5322 @item !
5323 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5324 @end table
5325
5326 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5327 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5328 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5329 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5330 attributes.
5331
5332 @kindex ORIGIN =
5333 @kindex o =
5334 @kindex org =
5335 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5336 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5337 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5338 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5339 @code{ORG}).
5340
5341 @kindex LENGTH =
5342 @kindex len =
5343 @kindex l =
5344 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5345 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5346 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5347 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5348
5349 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5350 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5351 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5352 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5353 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5354 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5355 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5356 region.
5357
5358 @smallexample
5359 @group
5360 MEMORY
5361 @{
5362 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5363 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5364 @}
5365 @end group
5366 @end smallexample
5367
5368 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5369 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5370 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5371 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5372 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5373 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5374 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5375 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5376 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5377
5378 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5379 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5380 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5381
5382 @smallexample
5383 @group
5384 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5385 @end group
5386 @end smallexample
5387
5388 @node PHDRS
5389 @section PHDRS Command
5390 @kindex PHDRS
5391 @cindex program headers
5392 @cindex ELF program headers
5393 @cindex program segments
5394 @cindex segments, ELF
5395 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5396 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5397 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5398 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5399
5400 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5401 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5402 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5403 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5404 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5405
5406 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5407 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5408 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5409 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5410 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5411
5412 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5413 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5414 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5415
5416 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5417 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5418
5419 @smallexample
5420 @group
5421 PHDRS
5422 @{
5423 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5424 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5425 @}
5426 @end group
5427 @end smallexample
5428
5429 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5430 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5431 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5432 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5433 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5434 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5435
5436 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5437 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5438 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5439 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5440 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5441 Section Phdr}.
5442
5443 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5444 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5445 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5446 contain the section.
5447
5448 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5449 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5450 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5451 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5452 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5453 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5454 segment at all.
5455
5456 @kindex FILEHDR
5457 @kindex PHDRS
5458 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5459 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5460 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5461 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5462 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5463 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5464 these keywords.
5465
5466 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5467 value of the keyword.
5468
5469 @table @asis
5470 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5471 Indicates an unused program header.
5472
5473 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5474 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5475 the file.
5476
5477 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5478 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5479
5480 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5481 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5482 found.
5483
5484 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5485 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5486
5487 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5488 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5489 ABI.
5490
5491 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5492 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5493
5494 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5495 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5496
5497 @item @var{expression}
5498 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5499 be used for types not defined above.
5500 @end table
5501
5502 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5503 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5504 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5505 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5506 output section attribute.
5507
5508 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5509 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5510 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5511 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5512 header.
5513
5514 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5515 headers used on a native ELF system.
5516
5517 @example
5518 @group
5519 PHDRS
5520 @{
5521 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5522 interp PT_INTERP ;
5523 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5524 data PT_LOAD ;
5525 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5526 @}
5527
5528 SECTIONS
5529 @{
5530 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5531 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5532 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5533 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5534 @dots{}
5535 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5536 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5537 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5538 @dots{}
5539 @}
5540 @end group
5541 @end example
5542
5543 @node VERSION
5544 @section VERSION Command
5545 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5546 @cindex symbol versions
5547 @cindex version script
5548 @cindex versions of symbols
5549 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5550 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5551 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5552 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5553 shared library.
5554
5555 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5556 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5557 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5558
5559 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5560 @smallexample
5561 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5562 @end smallexample
5563
5564 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5565 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5566 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5567 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5568 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5569 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5570 library.
5571
5572 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5573 examples.
5574
5575 @smallexample
5576 VERS_1.1 @{
5577 global:
5578 foo1;
5579 local:
5580 old*;
5581 original*;
5582 new*;
5583 @};
5584
5585 VERS_1.2 @{
5586 foo2;
5587 @} VERS_1.1;
5588
5589 VERS_2.0 @{
5590 bar1; bar2;
5591 extern "C++" @{
5592 ns::*;
5593 "f(int, double)";
5594 @};
5595 @} VERS_1.2;
5596 @end smallexample
5597
5598 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5599 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5600 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5601 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5602 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5603 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5604 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5605 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5606 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5607 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5608
5609 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5610 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5611 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5612
5613 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5614 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5615 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5616
5617 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5618 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5619 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5620 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5621 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5622 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5623 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5624 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5625 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5626
5627 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5628 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5629 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5630 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5631
5632 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5633 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5634 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5635 won't.
5636
5637 @smallexample
5638 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5639 @end smallexample
5640
5641 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5642 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5643 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5644 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5645 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5646 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5647 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5648 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5649 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5650 search for each symbol reference.
5651
5652 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5653 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5654 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5655 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5656 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5657 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5658 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5659 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5660 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5661
5662 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5663 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5664 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5665 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5666 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5667 @smallexample
5668 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5669 @end smallexample
5670 @noindent
5671 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5672 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5673 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5674 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5675 takes precedence over a version script.
5676
5677 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5678 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5679 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5680 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5681 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5682
5683 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5684 source file. Here is an example:
5685
5686 @smallexample
5687 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5688 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5689 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5690 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5691 @end smallexample
5692
5693 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5694 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5695 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5696 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5697
5698 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5699 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5700 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5701 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5702 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5703 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5704
5705 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5706 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5707 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5708 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5709
5710 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5711
5712 @smallexample
5713 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5714 @end smallexample
5715
5716 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5717 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5718 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5719 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5720 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5721
5722 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5723 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5724 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5725 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5726 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5727 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5728 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5729 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5730 expect when you upgrade.
5731
5732 @node Expressions
5733 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5734 @cindex expressions
5735 @cindex arithmetic
5736 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5737 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5738 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5739 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5740
5741 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5742
5743 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5744 expressions.
5745
5746 @menu
5747 * Constants:: Constants
5748 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5749 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5750 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5751 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5752 * Operators:: Operators
5753 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5754 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5755 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5756 @end menu
5757
5758 @node Constants
5759 @subsection Constants
5760 @cindex integer notation
5761 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5762 All constants are integers.
5763
5764 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5765 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5766 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5767 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5768 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5769 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5770
5771 @cindex scaled integers
5772 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5773 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5774 @cindex suffixes for integers
5775 @cindex integer suffixes
5776 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5777 constant by
5778 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5779 @ifnottex
5780 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5781 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5782 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5783 @end ifnottex
5784 @tex
5785 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5786 @end tex
5787 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5788 respectively. For example, the following
5789 all refer to the same quantity:
5790
5791 @smallexample
5792 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5793 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5794 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5795 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5796 @end smallexample
5797
5798 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5799 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5800
5801 @node Symbolic Constants
5802 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5803 @cindex symbolic constants
5804 @kindex CONSTANT
5805 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5806 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5807
5808 @table @code
5809 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5810 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5811 The target's maximum page size.
5812
5813 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5814 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5815 The target's default page size.
5816 @end table
5817
5818 So for example:
5819
5820 @smallexample
5821 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5822 @end smallexample
5823
5824 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5825 supported by the target.
5826
5827 @node Symbols
5828 @subsection Symbol Names
5829 @cindex symbol names
5830 @cindex names
5831 @cindex quoted symbol names
5832 @kindex "
5833 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5834 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5835 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5836 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5837 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5838 @smallexample
5839 "SECTION" = 9;
5840 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5841 @end smallexample
5842
5843 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5844 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5845 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5846
5847 @node Orphan Sections
5848 @subsection Orphan Sections
5849 @cindex orphan
5850 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5851 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5852 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5853 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5854 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5855
5856 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5857 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5858 placed at the end of that output section.
5859
5860 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5861 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5862 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5863 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5864 one new output section.
5865
5866 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5867 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5868 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5869 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5870 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5871 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5872 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5873
5874 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5875 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5876 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5877
5878 @node Location Counter
5879 @subsection The Location Counter
5880 @kindex .
5881 @cindex dot
5882 @cindex location counter
5883 @cindex current output location
5884 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5885 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5886 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5887 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5888 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5889
5890 @cindex holes
5891 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5892 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5893 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5894 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5895 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5896
5897 @smallexample
5898 SECTIONS
5899 @{
5900 output :
5901 @{
5902 file1(.text)
5903 . = . + 1000;
5904 file2(.text)
5905 . += 1000;
5906 file3(.text)
5907 @} = 0x12345678;
5908 @}
5909 @end smallexample
5910 @noindent
5911 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5912 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5913 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5914 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5915 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5916 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5917
5918 @cindex dot inside sections
5919 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5920 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5921 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5922 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5923 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5924 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5925
5926 @smallexample
5927 SECTIONS
5928 @{
5929 . = 0x100
5930 .text: @{
5931 *(.text)
5932 . = 0x200
5933 @}
5934 . = 0x500
5935 .data: @{
5936 *(.data)
5937 . += 0x600
5938 @}
5939 @}
5940 @end smallexample
5941
5942 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5943 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5944 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5945 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5946 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5947 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5948 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5949 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5950
5951 @cindex dot outside sections
5952 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5953 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5954 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5955
5956 @smallexample
5957 SECTIONS
5958 @{
5959 start_of_text = . ;
5960 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5961 end_of_text = . ;
5962
5963 start_of_data = . ;
5964 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5965 end_of_data = . ;
5966 @}
5967 @end smallexample
5968
5969 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5970 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5971 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5972 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5973 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5974 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5975 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5976 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5977 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5978 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5979 as follows:
5980
5981 @smallexample
5982 SECTIONS
5983 @{
5984 start_of_text = . ;
5985 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5986 end_of_text = . ;
5987
5988 start_of_data = . ;
5989 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5990 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5991 end_of_data = . ;
5992 @}
5993 @end smallexample
5994
5995 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5996 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5997 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5998 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5999 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6000 section. So you could write:
6001
6002 @smallexample
6003 SECTIONS
6004 @{
6005 start_of_text = . ;
6006 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6007 end_of_text = . ;
6008
6009 . = . ;
6010 start_of_data = . ;
6011 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6012 end_of_data = . ;
6013 @}
6014 @end smallexample
6015
6016 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6017 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6018
6019 @need 2000
6020 @node Operators
6021 @subsection Operators
6022 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6023 @cindex arithmetic operators
6024 @cindex precedence in expressions
6025 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6026 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6027 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6028 @ifnottex
6029 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6030 @smallexample
6031 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6032 (highest)
6033 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6034 2 left * / %
6035 3 left + -
6036 4 left >> <<
6037 5 left == != > < <= >=
6038 6 left &
6039 7 left |
6040 8 left &&
6041 9 left ||
6042 10 right ? :
6043 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6044 (lowest)
6045 @end smallexample
6046 Notes:
6047 (1) Prefix operators
6048 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6049 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6050 @end ifnottex
6051 @tex
6052 \vskip \baselineskip
6053 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6054 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6055 \hrule
6056 \halign
6057 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6058 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6059 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6060 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6061 \noalign{\hrule}
6062 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6063 &highest&&&&&\cr
6064 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6065 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6066 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6067 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6068 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6069 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6070 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6071 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6072 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6073 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6074 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6075 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6076 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6077 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6078 \hrule}
6079 @end tex
6080 @iftex
6081 {
6082 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6083 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6084 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6085 }
6086 @end iftex
6087 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6088
6089 @node Evaluation
6090 @subsection Evaluation
6091 @cindex lazy evaluation
6092 @cindex expression evaluation order
6093 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6094 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6095
6096 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6097 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6098 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6099 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6100
6101 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6102 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6103 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6104 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6105
6106 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6107 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6108 allocation.
6109
6110 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6111 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6112
6113 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6114 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6115 following
6116 @smallexample
6117 @group
6118 SECTIONS
6119 @{
6120 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6121 @{ *(.text) @}
6122 @}
6123 @end group
6124 @end smallexample
6125 @noindent
6126 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6127 address}.
6128
6129 @node Expression Section
6130 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6131 @cindex expression sections
6132 @cindex absolute expressions
6133 @cindex relative expressions
6134 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6135 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6136 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6137 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6138 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6139 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6140 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6141 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6142 operations.
6143
6144 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6145 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6146 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6147 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6148 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6149 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6150 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6151 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6152 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6153 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6154 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6155 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6156 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6157 everywhere.
6158
6159 In the following simple example,
6160
6161 @smallexample
6162 @group
6163 SECTIONS
6164 @{
6165 . = 0x100;
6166 __executable_start = 0x100;
6167 .data :
6168 @{
6169 . = 0x10;
6170 __data_start = 0x10;
6171 *(.data)
6172 @}
6173 @dots{}
6174 @}
6175 @end group
6176 @end smallexample
6177
6178 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6179 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6180 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6181 section in the second two assignments.
6182
6183 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6184 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6185
6186 @itemize @bullet
6187 @item
6188 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6189 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6190 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6191 @item
6192 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6193 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6194 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6195 @item
6196 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6197 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6198 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6199 before applying the operator.
6200 @end itemize
6201
6202 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6203
6204 @itemize @bullet
6205 @item
6206 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6207 @item
6208 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6209 @item
6210 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6211 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6212 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6213 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6214 but an absolute address otherwise.
6215 @item
6216 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6217 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6218 section as the relative operand(s).
6219 @item
6220 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6221 conversions) is an absolute address.
6222 @end itemize
6223
6224 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6225 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6226 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6227 section @samp{.data}:
6228 @smallexample
6229 SECTIONS
6230 @{
6231 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6232 @}
6233 @end smallexample
6234 @noindent
6235 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6236 @samp{.data} section.
6237
6238 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6239 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6240
6241 @node Builtin Functions
6242 @subsection Builtin Functions
6243 @cindex functions in expressions
6244 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6245 use in linker script expressions.
6246
6247 @table @code
6248 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6249 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6250 @cindex expression, absolute
6251 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6252 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6253 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6254 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6255
6256 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6257 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6258 @cindex section address in expression
6259 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6260 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6261 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6262 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6263 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6264 the other two will be absolute:
6265 @smallexample
6266 @group
6267 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6268 .output1 :
6269 @{
6270 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6271 @dots{}
6272 @}
6273 .output :
6274 @{
6275 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6276 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6277 @}
6278 @dots{} @}
6279 @end group
6280 @end smallexample
6281
6282 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6283 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6284 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6285 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6286 @cindex round up location counter
6287 @cindex align location counter
6288 @cindex round up expression
6289 @cindex align expression
6290 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6291 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6292 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6293 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6294 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6295 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6296
6297 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6298 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6299 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6300 input sections:
6301 @smallexample
6302 @group
6303 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6304 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6305 *(.data)
6306 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6307 @}
6308 @dots{} @}
6309 @end group
6310 @end smallexample
6311 @noindent
6312 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6313 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6314 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6315 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6316
6317 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6318
6319 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6320 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6321 @cindex section alignment
6322 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6323 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6324 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6325 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6326 value in that section.
6327 @smallexample
6328 @group
6329 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6330 .output @{
6331 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6332 @dots{}
6333 @}
6334 @dots{} @}
6335 @end group
6336 @end smallexample
6337
6338 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6339 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6340 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6341 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6342 section.
6343
6344 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6345 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6346 This is equivalent to either
6347 @smallexample
6348 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6349 @end smallexample
6350 or
6351 @smallexample
6352 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6353 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6354 @end smallexample
6355 @noindent
6356 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6357 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6358 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6359 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6360 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6361 bytes in the on-disk file.
6362
6363 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6364 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6365 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6366 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6367 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6368 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6369 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6370
6371 @noindent
6372 Example:
6373 @smallexample
6374 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6375 @end smallexample
6376
6377 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6378 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6379 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6380 evaluation purposes.
6381
6382 @smallexample
6383 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6384 @end smallexample
6385
6386 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6387 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6388 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6389 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6390 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6391 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6392 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6393 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6394 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6395 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6396 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6397 section alignment.
6398
6399 @smallexample
6400 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6401 @end smallexample
6402
6403 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6404 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6405 @cindex symbol defaults
6406 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6407 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6408 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6409 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6410 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6411 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6412 existed, its value is preserved:
6413
6414 @smallexample
6415 @group
6416 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6417 .text : @{
6418 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6419 @dots{}
6420 @}
6421 @dots{}
6422 @}
6423 @end group
6424 @end smallexample
6425
6426 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6427 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6428 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6429
6430 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6431 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6432 @cindex section load address in expression
6433 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6434 Section LMA}).
6435
6436 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6437 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6438 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6439 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6440
6441 @kindex MAX
6442 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6443 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6444
6445 @kindex MIN
6446 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6447 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6448
6449 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6450 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6451 @cindex unallocated address, next
6452 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6453 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6454 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6455 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6456
6457 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6458 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6459 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6460
6461 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6462 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6463 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6464 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6465 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6466 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6467 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6468 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6469 name.
6470
6471 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6472 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6473 @cindex section size
6474 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6475 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6476 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6477 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6478 @smallexample
6479 @group
6480 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6481 .output @{
6482 .start = . ;
6483 @dots{}
6484 .end = . ;
6485 @}
6486 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6487 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6488 @dots{} @}
6489 @end group
6490 @end smallexample
6491
6492 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6493 @itemx sizeof_headers
6494 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6495 @cindex header size
6496 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6497 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6498 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6499 choose, to facilitate paging.
6500
6501 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6502 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6503 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6504 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6505 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6506 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6507 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6508 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6509 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6510 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6511 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6512 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6513 @end table
6514
6515 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6516 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6517 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6518 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6519 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6520 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6521 linker will report an error.
6522
6523 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6524
6525 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6526 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6527 commands.
6528
6529 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6530 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6531 read. This can affect archive searching.
6532
6533 @ifset GENERIC
6534 @node Machine Dependent
6535 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6536
6537 @cindex machine dependencies
6538 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6539 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6540 functionality are not listed.
6541
6542 @menu
6543 @ifset H8300
6544 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6545 @end ifset
6546 @ifset M68HC11
6547 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6548 @end ifset
6549 @ifset ARM
6550 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6551 @end ifset
6552 @ifset HPPA
6553 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6554 @end ifset
6555 @ifset M68K
6556 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6557 @end ifset
6558 @ifset MIPS
6559 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6560 @end ifset
6561 @ifset MMIX
6562 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6563 @end ifset
6564 @ifset MSP430
6565 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6566 @end ifset
6567 @ifset NDS32
6568 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6569 @end ifset
6570 @ifset NIOSII
6571 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6572 @end ifset
6573 @ifset POWERPC
6574 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6575 @end ifset
6576 @ifset POWERPC64
6577 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6578 @end ifset
6579 @ifset S/390
6580 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6581 @end ifset
6582 @ifset SPU
6583 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6584 @end ifset
6585 @ifset TICOFF
6586 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6587 @end ifset
6588 @ifset WIN32
6589 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6590 @end ifset
6591 @ifset XTENSA
6592 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6593 @end ifset
6594 @end menu
6595 @end ifset
6596
6597 @ifset H8300
6598 @ifclear GENERIC
6599 @raisesections
6600 @end ifclear
6601
6602 @node H8/300
6603 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6604
6605 @cindex H8/300 support
6606 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6607 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6608
6609 @table @emph
6610 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6611 @item relaxing address modes
6612 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6613 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6614 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6615 respectively.
6616
6617 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6618 @item synthesizing instructions
6619 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6620 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6621 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6622 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6623 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6624 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6625 top page of memory).
6626
6627 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6628 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6629 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6630 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6631 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6632 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6633 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6634
6635 @item bit manipulation instructions
6636 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6637 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6638 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6639 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6640 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6641 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6642 the top page of memory).
6643
6644 @item system control instructions
6645 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6646 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6647 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6648 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6649 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6650 the top page of memory).
6651 @end table
6652
6653 @ifclear GENERIC
6654 @lowersections
6655 @end ifclear
6656 @end ifset
6657
6658 @ifclear GENERIC
6659 @ifset Renesas
6660 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6661 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6662 @node Renesas
6663 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6664
6665 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6666 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6667 options are required for these chips.
6668 @end ifset
6669 @end ifclear
6670
6671 @ifset ARM
6672 @ifclear GENERIC
6673 @raisesections
6674 @end ifclear
6675
6676 @ifset M68HC11
6677 @ifclear GENERIC
6678 @raisesections
6679 @end ifclear
6680
6681 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6682 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6683
6684 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6685
6686 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6687
6688 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6689 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6690
6691 @table @emph
6692 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6693 @item relaxing address modes
6694 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6695 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6696 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6697 respectively.
6698
6699 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6700 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6701 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6702
6703 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6704 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6705 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6706 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6707 @code{bset} instructions.
6708
6709 @end table
6710
6711 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6712
6713 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6714 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6715 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6716 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6717 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6718 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6719 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6720 point to the function trampoline.
6721
6722 @ifclear GENERIC
6723 @lowersections
6724 @end ifclear
6725 @end ifset
6726
6727 @node ARM
6728 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6729
6730 @cindex ARM interworking support
6731 @kindex --support-old-code
6732 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6733 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6734 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6735 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6736 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6737 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6738 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6739 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6740 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6741 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6742
6743 @cindex thumb entry point
6744 @cindex entry point, thumb
6745 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6746 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6747 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6748 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6749 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6750 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6751
6752 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6753 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6754 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6755 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6756 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6757 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6758
6759 @cindex BE8
6760 @kindex --be8
6761 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6762 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6763 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6764 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6765 little-endian code.
6766
6767 @cindex TARGET1
6768 @kindex --target1-rel
6769 @kindex --target1-abs
6770 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6771 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6772 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6773 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6774
6775 @cindex TARGET2
6776 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6777 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6778 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6779 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6780 @table @samp
6781 @item rel
6782 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6783 @item abs
6784 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6785 @item got-rel
6786 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6787 @end table
6788
6789 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6790 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6791 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6792 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6793 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6794 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6795
6796 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6797 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6798 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6799
6800 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6801 relocations are ignored.
6802
6803 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6804 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6805 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6806 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6807
6808 @smallexample
6809 TST rM, #1
6810 MOVEQ PC, rM
6811 BX Rn
6812 @end smallexample
6813
6814 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6815 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6816 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6817
6818 @cindex USE_BLX
6819 @kindex --use-blx
6820 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6821 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6822 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6823 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6824 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6825
6826 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6827 specify it if you are using that target.
6828
6829 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6830 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6831 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6832 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6833 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6834 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6835 the support code can read the intended values.
6836
6837 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6838 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6839 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6840 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6841 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6842 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6843
6844 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6845 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6846 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6847 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6848 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6849 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6850
6851 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6852 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6853 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6854 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6855 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6856 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6857 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6858
6859 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6860 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6861 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6862 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6863 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6864 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6865 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6866
6867 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6868 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6869 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6870
6871 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6872 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6873
6874 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6875 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6876 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6877 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6878 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6879 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6880 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6881 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6882
6883 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6884 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6885
6886 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6887 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6888 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6889 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6890 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6891
6892 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6893 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6894 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6895 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6896 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6897 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6898
6899 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6900 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6901
6902 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6903 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6904 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6905 occurs.
6906
6907 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6908 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6909 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6910 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6911 occurs.
6912
6913 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6914 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6915 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6916 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6917 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6918 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6919 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6920 not be diagnosed.
6921
6922 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6923 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6924 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6925 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6926 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6927 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6928 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6929
6930 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6931 @kindex --pic-veneer
6932 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6933 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6934 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6935 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6936
6937 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6938 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6939 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6940 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6941 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6942 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6943 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6944 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6945 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6946 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6947 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6948 where they should be placed.
6949
6950 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6951 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6952 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6953 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6954 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6955 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6956 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6957 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6958 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6959 from the input sections.
6960
6961 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6962 @samp{N = +1}.
6963
6964 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6965 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6966 otherwise.
6967
6968 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6969 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6970 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6971 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6972
6973 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6974
6975 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6976 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6977 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6978 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6979
6980 Please contact ARM for further details.
6981
6982 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6983 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6984 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6985 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6986
6987 @kindex --long-plt
6988 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6989 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6990 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6991 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6992
6993 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6994 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
6995 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6996 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6997
6998 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
6999 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7000 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7001 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7002 veneers in memory.
7003
7004 @kindex --cmse-implib
7005 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7006 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7007 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7008 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7009 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7010
7011 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7012 @cindex Input import library
7013 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7014 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7015 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7016 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7017 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7018 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7019 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7020 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7021 specified.
7022
7023 @ifclear GENERIC
7024 @lowersections
7025 @end ifclear
7026 @end ifset
7027
7028 @ifset HPPA
7029 @ifclear GENERIC
7030 @raisesections
7031 @end ifclear
7032
7033 @node HPPA ELF32
7034 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7035 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7036 @kindex --multi-subspace
7037 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7038 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7039 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7040 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7041 multiple sub-spaces.
7042
7043 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7044 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7045 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7046 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7047 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7048 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7049 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7050 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7051 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7052 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7053 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7054 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7055 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7056 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7057 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7058 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7059
7060 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7061 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7062 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7063 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7064
7065 @ifclear GENERIC
7066 @lowersections
7067 @end ifclear
7068 @end ifset
7069
7070 @ifset M68K
7071 @ifclear GENERIC
7072 @raisesections
7073 @end ifclear
7074
7075 @node M68K
7076 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7077
7078 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7079 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7080 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7081 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7082 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7083 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7084 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7085 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7086 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7087 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7088 support such GOTs.
7089 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7090 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7091 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7092 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7093
7094 @ifclear GENERIC
7095 @lowersections
7096 @end ifclear
7097 @end ifset
7098
7099 @ifset MIPS
7100 @ifclear GENERIC
7101 @raisesections
7102 @end ifclear
7103
7104 @node MIPS
7105 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7106
7107 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7108 @kindex --insn32
7109 @kindex --no-insn32
7110 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7111 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7112 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7113 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7114 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7115 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7116
7117 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7118 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7119 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7120 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7121 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7122 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7123 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7124 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7125 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7126 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7127 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7128 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7129
7130 @ifclear GENERIC
7131 @lowersections
7132 @end ifclear
7133 @end ifset
7134
7135 @ifset MMIX
7136 @ifclear GENERIC
7137 @raisesections
7138 @end ifclear
7139
7140 @node MMIX
7141 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7142 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7143 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7144 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7145 can translate between the two formats.
7146
7147 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7148 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7149 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7150 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7151 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7152 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7153 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7154 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7155
7156 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7157 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7158 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7159 of a section.
7160
7161 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7162 are left out from an mmo file.
7163
7164 @ifclear GENERIC
7165 @lowersections
7166 @end ifclear
7167 @end ifset
7168
7169 @ifset MSP430
7170 @ifclear GENERIC
7171 @raisesections
7172 @end ifclear
7173
7174 @node MSP430
7175 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7176 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7177 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7178 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7179
7180 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7181 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7182
7183 @table @code
7184 @item @samp{.vectors}
7185 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7186
7187 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7188 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7189 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7190
7191 @item @samp{.infomem}
7192 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7193 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7194
7195 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7196 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7197 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7198
7199 @item @samp{.noinit}
7200 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7201
7202 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7203 @end table
7204
7205 @table @option
7206 @cindex MSP430 Options
7207 @kindex --code-region
7208 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7209 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7210 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7211 using this option.
7212
7213 @kindex --data-region
7214 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7215 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7216 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7217 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7218
7219 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7220 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7221 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7222 and @code{--data-region} options.
7223 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7224 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7225 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7226 @end table
7227
7228 @ifclear GENERIC
7229 @lowersections
7230 @end ifclear
7231 @end ifset
7232
7233 @ifset NDS32
7234 @ifclear GENERIC
7235 @raisesections
7236 @end ifclear
7237
7238 @node NDS32
7239 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7240 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7241 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7242 relaxes objects according to these options.
7243
7244 @table @code
7245 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7246 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7247
7248 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7249 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7250
7251 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7252 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7253
7254 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7255 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7256
7257 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7258 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7259
7260 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7261 Update the existing EX9 table.
7262
7263 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7264 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7265
7266 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7267 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7268
7269 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7270 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7271
7272 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7273 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7274 @end table
7275
7276 @ifclear GENERIC
7277 @lowersections
7278 @end ifclear
7279 @end ifset
7280
7281 @ifset NIOSII
7282 @ifclear GENERIC
7283 @raisesections
7284 @end ifclear
7285
7286 @node Nios II
7287 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7288 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7289 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7290
7291 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7292 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7293 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7294 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7295 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7296 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7297 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7298 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7299 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7300 larger than 256MB.
7301
7302 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7303 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7304 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7305 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7306 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7307 register as a temporary.
7308
7309 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7310 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7311 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7312
7313 @ifclear GENERIC
7314 @lowersections
7315 @end ifclear
7316 @end ifset
7317
7318 @ifset POWERPC
7319 @ifclear GENERIC
7320 @raisesections
7321 @end ifclear
7322
7323 @node PowerPC ELF32
7324 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7325 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7326 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7327 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7328 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7329 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7330 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7331 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7332 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7333 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7334 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7335 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7336 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7337
7338 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7339 @table @option
7340 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7341 @kindex --bss-plt
7342 @item --bss-plt
7343 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7344 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7345 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7346 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7347 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7348 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7349 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7350 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7351
7352 @kindex --secure-plt
7353 @item --secure-plt
7354 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7355 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7356 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7357 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7358 style BSS PLT.
7359
7360 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7361 @kindex --sdata-got
7362 @item --sdata-got
7363 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7364 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7365 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7366 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7367 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7368 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7369 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7370 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7371 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7372 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7373 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7374 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7375
7376 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7377 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7378 @item --emit-stub-syms
7379 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7380 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7381
7382 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7383 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7384 @item --no-tls-optimize
7385 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7386 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7387 disable the optimization.
7388 @end table
7389
7390 @ifclear GENERIC
7391 @lowersections
7392 @end ifclear
7393 @end ifset
7394
7395 @ifset POWERPC64
7396 @ifclear GENERIC
7397 @raisesections
7398 @end ifclear
7399
7400 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7401 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7402
7403 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7404 @table @option
7405 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7406 @kindex --stub-group-size
7407 @item --stub-group-size
7408 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7409 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7410 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7411 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7412 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7413 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7414 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7415 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7416 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7417 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7418 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7419 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7420 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7421 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7422
7423 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7424 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7425 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7426 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7427
7428 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7429 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7430 @item --emit-stub-syms
7431 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7432 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7433
7434 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7435 @kindex --dotsyms
7436 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7437 @item --dotsyms
7438 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7439 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7440 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7441 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7442 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7443 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7444 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7445 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7446 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7447 feature.
7448
7449 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7450 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7451 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7452 @item --save-restore-funcs
7453 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7454 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7455 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7456 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7457 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7458 link.
7459
7460 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7461 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7462 @item --no-tls-optimize
7463 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7464 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7465 disable the optimization.
7466
7467 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7468 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7469 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7470 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7471 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7472 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7473 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7474 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7475 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7476 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7477 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7478 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7479 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7480 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7481 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7482
7483 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7484 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7485 @item --no-opd-optimize
7486 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7487 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7488 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7489 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7490
7491 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7492 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7493 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7494 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7495 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7496 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7497 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7498
7499 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7500 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7501 @item --no-toc-optimize
7502 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7503 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7504 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7505 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7506 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7507 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7508 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7509 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7510 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7511 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7512 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7513 optimization.
7514
7515 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7516 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7517 @item --no-multi-toc
7518 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7519 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7520 where TOC
7521 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7522 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7523 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7524 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7525 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7526 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7527 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7528 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7529
7530 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7531 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7532 @item --no-toc-sort
7533 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7534 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7535 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7536 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7537 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7538 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7539 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7540 off this feature.
7541
7542 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7543 @kindex --plt-align
7544 @kindex --no-plt-align
7545 @item --plt-align
7546 @itemx --no-plt-align
7547 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7548 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7549 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7550 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7551 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7552 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7553 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7554
7555 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7556 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7557 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7558 @item --plt-static-chain
7559 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7560 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7561 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7562 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7563
7564 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7565 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7566 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7567 @item --plt-thread-safe
7568 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7569 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7570 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7571 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7572 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7573 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7574 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7575 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7576 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7577 default behaviour.
7578
7579 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7580 @kindex --plt-localentry
7581 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7582 @item --plt-localentry
7583 @itemx --no-localentry
7584 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7585 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7586 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7587 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7588 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7589 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7590 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7591 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7592 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7593 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7594 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7595 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7596 @end table
7597
7598 @ifclear GENERIC
7599 @lowersections
7600 @end ifclear
7601 @end ifset
7602
7603 @ifset S/390
7604 @ifclear GENERIC
7605 @raisesections
7606 @end ifclear
7607
7608 @node S/390 ELF
7609 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7610
7611 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7612 @table @option
7613
7614 @cindex S/390
7615 @kindex --s390-pgste
7616 @item --s390-pgste
7617 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7618 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7619 binaries marked that way.
7620 @end table
7621
7622 @ifclear GENERIC
7623 @lowersections
7624 @end ifclear
7625 @end ifset
7626
7627 @ifset SPU
7628 @ifclear GENERIC
7629 @raisesections
7630 @end ifclear
7631
7632 @node SPU ELF
7633 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7634
7635 @cindex SPU ELF options
7636 @table @option
7637
7638 @cindex SPU plugins
7639 @kindex --plugin
7640 @item --plugin
7641 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7642
7643 @cindex SPU overlays
7644 @kindex --no-overlays
7645 @item --no-overlays
7646 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7647 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7648 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7649 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7650
7651 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7652 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7653 @item --emit-stub-syms
7654 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7655 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7656
7657 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7658 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7659 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7660 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7661 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7662 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7663
7664 @cindex SPU local store size
7665 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7666 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7667 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7668 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7669 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7670
7671 @cindex SPU
7672 @kindex --stack-analysis
7673 @item --stack-analysis
7674 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7675 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7676 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7677 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7678 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7679 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7680 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7681 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7682 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7683 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7684 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7685 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7686 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7687 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7688 and calls will be given.
7689
7690 @cindex SPU
7691 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7692 @item --emit-stack-syms
7693 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7694 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7695 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7696 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7697 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7698 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7699 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7700 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7701 @end table
7702
7703 @ifclear GENERIC
7704 @lowersections
7705 @end ifclear
7706 @end ifset
7707
7708 @ifset TICOFF
7709 @ifclear GENERIC
7710 @raisesections
7711 @end ifclear
7712
7713 @node TI COFF
7714 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7715 @cindex TI COFF versions
7716 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7717 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7718 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7719 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7720 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7721 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7722
7723 @ifclear GENERIC
7724 @lowersections
7725 @end ifclear
7726 @end ifset
7727
7728 @ifset WIN32
7729 @ifclear GENERIC
7730 @raisesections
7731 @end ifclear
7732
7733 @node WIN32
7734 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7735
7736 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7737 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7738 command line options mentioned here.
7739
7740 @table @emph
7741 @cindex import libraries
7742 @item import libraries
7743 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7744 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7745 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7746 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7747 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7748 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7749
7750 @item exporting DLL symbols
7751 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7752 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7753
7754 @table @emph
7755 @item using auto-export functionality
7756 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7757 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7758 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7759
7760 @itemize
7761 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7762 @item --exclude-symbols
7763 @item --exclude-libs
7764 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7765 @item --version-script
7766 @end itemize
7767
7768 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7769 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7770 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7771 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7772 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7773 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7774 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7775 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7776
7777 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7778 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7779 if either of the following are true:
7780
7781 @itemize
7782 @item A DEF file is used.
7783 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7784 @end itemize
7785
7786 @item using a DEF file
7787 @cindex using a DEF file
7788 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7789 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7790 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7791 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7792 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7793
7794 @example
7795 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7796 @end example
7797
7798 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7799 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7800
7801 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7802
7803 @example
7804 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7805
7806 EXPORTS
7807 foo
7808 bar
7809 _bar = bar
7810 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7811 var1 DATA
7812 doo = foo == foo2
7813 eoo DATA == var1
7814 @end example
7815
7816 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7817 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7818 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7819 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7820 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7821 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7822 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7823 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7824 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7825
7826 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7827 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7828 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7829
7830 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7831 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7832 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7833 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7834
7835 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7836 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7837 non-default base address for the image.
7838
7839 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7840 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7841 filename specified on the command line.
7842
7843 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7844
7845 @example
7846 EXPORTS
7847 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7848 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7849 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7850 @end example
7851
7852 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7853 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7854 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7855 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7856 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7857 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7858 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7859
7860 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7861
7862 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7863 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7864 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7865 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7866 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7867
7868 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7869 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7870 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7871 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7872
7873 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7874 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7875 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7876 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7877 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7878 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7879 application will behave unexpectedly.
7880
7881 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7882 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7883 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7884 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7885 the DLL without an import library.
7886
7887 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7888 other DEF file statements
7889
7890 @cindex creating a DEF file
7891 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7892 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7893
7894 @item Using decorations
7895 @cindex Using decorations
7896 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7897 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7898 declared as:
7899
7900 @example
7901 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7902 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7903 @end example
7904
7905 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7906 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7907 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7908 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7909
7910 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7911 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7912 instead:
7913
7914 @example
7915 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7916 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7917 @end example
7918
7919 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7920 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7921 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7922 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7923 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7924 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7925 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7926 information.
7927 @end table
7928
7929 @cindex automatic data imports
7930 @item automatic data imports
7931 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7932 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7933 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7934 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7935 code to these platforms, especially for large
7936 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7937 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7938 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7939 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7940 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7941 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7942 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7943 trigger the feature's use.
7944
7945 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7946 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7947
7948 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7949 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7950
7951 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7952 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7953 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7954 below.
7955
7956 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7957 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7958 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7959 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7960 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7961 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7962 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7963 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7964 references.
7965
7966 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7967 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7968 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7969 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7970 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7971 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7972 run without error on an older system.
7973
7974 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7975 enabled as needed.
7976
7977 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7978 @item direct linking to a dll
7979 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7980 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7981 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7982 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7983 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7984 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7985 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7986 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7987 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7988 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7989
7990 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7991 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7992 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7993 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7994 select the dll instead of an import library.
7995
7996
7997 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7998 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7999
8000 @example
8001 libxxx.dll.a
8002 xxx.dll.a
8003 libxxx.a
8004 xxx.lib
8005 libxxx.lib
8006 cygxxx.dll (*)
8007 libxxx.dll
8008 xxx.dll
8009 @end example
8010
8011 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8012
8013 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8014 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8015 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8016 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8017 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8018
8019 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8020 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8021 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8022 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8023 could coexist on the same machine.
8024
8025 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8026 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8027 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8028
8029 @example
8030 bin/
8031 cygxxx.dll
8032 lib/
8033 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8034 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8035 @end example
8036
8037 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8038 done two ways:
8039
8040 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8041 @example
8042 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8043 @end example
8044
8045 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8046 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8047 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8048 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8049
8050 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8051 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8052 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8053 making the app/dll.
8054
8055 @example
8056 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8057 @end example
8058
8059 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8060
8061 @example
8062 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8063 @end example
8064
8065 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8066 perfectly legal
8067
8068 @example
8069 bin/
8070 cygxxx-5.dll
8071 lib/
8072 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8073 @end example
8074
8075 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8076 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8077 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8078
8079 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8080 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8081
8082 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8083 work with auto-imported data.
8084
8085 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8086 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8087 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8088 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8089 possible to do this without an import lib.
8090
8091 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8092 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8093 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8094 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8095
8096 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8097 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8098 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8099 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8100 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8101 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8102 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8103
8104 @item symbol aliasing
8105 @table @emph
8106 @item adding additional names
8107 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8108 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8109 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8110 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8111 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8112
8113 @example
8114 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8115
8116 EXPORTS
8117 foo
8118 _foo = foo
8119 @end example
8120
8121 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8122
8123 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8124 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8125
8126 @example
8127 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8128 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8129 @end example
8130
8131 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8132 symbols.
8133
8134 @item renaming symbols
8135 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8136 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8137 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8138 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8139 created). In the following example:
8140
8141 @example
8142 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8143
8144 EXPORTS
8145 _foo = foo
8146 @end example
8147
8148 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8149 @samp{_foo}.
8150 @end table
8151
8152 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8153 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8154 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8155 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8156 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8157 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8158 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8159 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8160 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8161 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8162 which is probably not what you wanted.
8163
8164 @cindex weak externals
8165 @item weak externals
8166 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8167 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8168 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8169 are three variants of weak externals:
8170 @itemize
8171 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8172 called lazy externals.
8173 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8174 This form is not presently implemented.
8175 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8176 implemented.
8177 @end itemize
8178 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8179 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8180 uses a default value.
8181
8182 @cindex aligned common symbols
8183 @item aligned common symbols
8184 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8185 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8186 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8187 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8188 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8189 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8190 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8191 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8192
8193 @end table
8194
8195 @ifclear GENERIC
8196 @lowersections
8197 @end ifclear
8198 @end ifset
8199
8200 @ifset XTENSA
8201 @ifclear GENERIC
8202 @raisesections
8203 @end ifclear
8204
8205 @node Xtensa
8206 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8207
8208 @cindex Xtensa processors
8209 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8210 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8211 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8212 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8213 example, with the command:
8214
8215 @smallexample
8216 SECTIONS
8217 @{
8218 .text : @{
8219 *(.literal .text)
8220 @}
8221 @}
8222 @end smallexample
8223
8224 @noindent
8225 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8226 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8227 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8228 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8229 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8230 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8231 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8232
8233 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8234 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8235 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8236 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8237 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8238 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8239 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8240 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8241 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8242 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8243 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8244 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8245
8246 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8247 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8248 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8249 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8250 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8251 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8252 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8253 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8254 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8255 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8256 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8257 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8258 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8259 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8260
8261 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8262 control the linker:
8263
8264 @cindex Xtensa options
8265 @table @option
8266 @item --size-opt
8267 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8268 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8269 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8270 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8271 preserve the correctness of the code.
8272 @end table
8273
8274 @ifclear GENERIC
8275 @lowersections
8276 @end ifclear
8277 @end ifset
8278
8279 @ifclear SingleFormat
8280 @node BFD
8281 @chapter BFD
8282
8283 @cindex back end
8284 @cindex object file management
8285 @cindex object formats available
8286 @kindex objdump -i
8287 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8288 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8289 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8290 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8291 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8292 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8293 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8294 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8295 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8296
8297 @cindex BFD requirements
8298 @cindex requirements for BFD
8299 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8300 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8301 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8302 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8303 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8304 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8305 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8306
8307 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8308 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8309 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8310 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8311
8312 @menu
8313 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8314 @end menu
8315
8316 @node BFD outline
8317 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8318 @cindex opening object files
8319 @include bfdsumm.texi
8320 @end ifclear
8321
8322 @node Reporting Bugs
8323 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8324 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8325 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8326
8327 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8328
8329 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8330 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8331 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8332 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8333 @command{ld}.
8334
8335 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8336 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8337
8338 @menu
8339 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8340 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8341 @end menu
8342
8343 @node Bug Criteria
8344 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8345 @cindex bug criteria
8346
8347 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8348
8349 @itemize @bullet
8350 @cindex fatal signal
8351 @cindex linker crash
8352 @cindex crash of linker
8353 @item
8354 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8355 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8356
8357 @cindex error on valid input
8358 @item
8359 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8360
8361 @cindex invalid input
8362 @item
8363 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8364 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8365 object files are correct.
8366
8367 @item
8368 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8369 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8370 @end itemize
8371
8372 @node Bug Reporting
8373 @section How to Report Bugs
8374 @cindex bug reports
8375 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8376
8377 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8378 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8379 recommend you contact that organization first.
8380
8381 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8382 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8383 distribution.
8384
8385 @ifset BUGURL
8386 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8387 @value{BUGURL}.
8388 @end ifset
8389
8390 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8391 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8392 fact or leave it out, state it!
8393
8394 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8395 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8396 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8397 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8398 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8399 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8400 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8401 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8402 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8403 and the most helpful.
8404
8405 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8406 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8407 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8408
8409 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8410 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8411 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8412 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8413
8414 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8415
8416 @itemize @bullet
8417 @item
8418 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8419 the @samp{--version} argument.
8420
8421 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8422 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8423
8424 @item
8425 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8426 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8427
8428 @item
8429 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8430 version number.
8431
8432 @item
8433 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8434 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8435
8436 @item
8437 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8438 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8439 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8440 sufficient.
8441
8442 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8443 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8444
8445 @item
8446 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8447 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8448 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8449 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8450 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8451 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8452 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8453 attachments are best.
8454
8455 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8456 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8457 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8458 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8459 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8460
8461 @item
8462 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8463 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8464
8465 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8466 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8467 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8468 a chance to make a mistake.
8469
8470 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8471 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8472 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8473 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8474 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8475 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8476 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8477 any conclusion from our observations.
8478
8479 @item
8480 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8481 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8482 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8483 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8484 context, not by line number.
8485
8486 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8487 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8488 @end itemize
8489
8490 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8491
8492 @itemize @bullet
8493 @item
8494 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8495
8496 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8497 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8498 changes will not affect it.
8499
8500 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8501 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8502 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8503 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8504
8505 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8506 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8507 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8508 less time, and so on.
8509
8510 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8511 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8512
8513 @item
8514 A patch for the bug.
8515
8516 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8517 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8518 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8519 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8520
8521 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8522 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8523 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8524 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8525 fixed.
8526
8527 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8528 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8529 help us to understand.
8530
8531 @item
8532 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8533
8534 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8535 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8536 @end itemize
8537
8538 @node MRI
8539 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8540 @cindex MRI compatibility
8541 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8542 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8543 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8544 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8545 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8546 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8547 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8548
8549 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8550 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8551 features to make use of them.
8552
8553 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8554 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8555
8556 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8557 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8558 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8559 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8560 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8561
8562 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8563
8564 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8565 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8566 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8567
8568 @table @code
8569 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8570 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8571 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8572 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8573 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8574 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8575 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8576 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8577 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8578 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8579 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8580
8581 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8582 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8583 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8584 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8585
8586 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8587
8588 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8589 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8590 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8591 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8592
8593 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8594 @item BASE @var{expression}
8595 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8596 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8597
8598 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8599 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8600 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8601 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8602
8603 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8604 @item END
8605 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8606
8607 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8608 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8609 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8610 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8611
8612 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8613 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8614 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8615 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8616
8617 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8618 same line, with no change in its effect.
8619
8620 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8621 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8622 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8623 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8624 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8625 command line.
8626
8627 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8628 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8629 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8630 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8631 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8632
8633 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8634 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8635 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8636 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8637 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8638 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8639 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8640 file, in the order specified.
8641
8642 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8643 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8644 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8645 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8646 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8647 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8648
8649 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8650 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8651 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8652 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8653 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8654 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8655 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8656 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8657 @end table
8658
8659 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8660 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8661 @include fdl.texi
8662
8663 @node LD Index
8664 @unnumbered LD Index
8665
8666 @printindex cp
8667
8668 @tex
8669 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8670 % meantime:
8671 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8672 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8673 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8674 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8675 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8676 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8677 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8678 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8679 \page\colophon
8680 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8681 @end tex
8682
8683 @bye